Samsung NOTE II User Manual

4 G  
L T E  
S M A R T P H O N E  
User Manual  
Please read this manual before operating your  
phone, and keep it for future reference.  
THERETO. NOTHING CONTAINED IN THE INSTRUCTION MANUAL SHALL BE CONSTRUED TO CREATE AN EXPRESS OR IMPLIED  
WARRANTY OF ANY KIND WHATSOEVER WITH RESPECT TO THE PRODUCT. IN ADDITION, SAMSUNG SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR  
ANY DAMAGES OF ANY KIND RESULTING FROM THE PURCHASE OR USE OF THE PRODUCT OR ARISING FROM THE BREACH OF  
THE EXPRESS WARRANTY, INCLUDING INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, OR LOSS OF ANTICIPATED PROFITS  
OR BENEFITS.  
SAMSUNG IS NOT LIABLE FOR PERFORMANCE ISSUES OR INCOMPATIBILITIES CAUSED BY YOUR EDITING OF REGISTRY SETTINGS,  
OR YOUR MODIFICATION OF OPERATING SYSTEM SOFTWARE.  
USING CUSTOM OPERATING SYSTEM SOFTWARE MAY CAUSE YOUR DEVICE AND APPLICATIONS TO WORK IMPROPERLY.  
SAFE™: "SAFE™" (Samsung for Enterprise) is a mark for a Samsung device which has been tested against Samsung's own  
internal criteria for interoperability with certain third party security-related solutions for MDM and VPN. The testing includes field  
testing with local network connection and menu tree testing which tests functionality of the solutions in conjunction with the  
Samsung device. During the testing, the device is tested with the security solutions to see if the solutions work with the device as  
described by the third party security solution providers. The testing, for example, includes field testing with local network  
connection and menu tree testing which tests functionality of the solutions in conjunction with the Samsung device. For more  
information about Samsung's SAFE™ program, please refer to www.samsung.com/us/safe  
.
Disclaimer of Warranties: EXCEPT AS OTHERWISE PROVIDED IN THEIR STANDARD END USER LICENSE AND WARRANTY, TO THE  
FULL EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS CO., LTD., SAMSUNG TELECOMMUNICATIONS AMERICA, LLC, AND  
THEIR AFFILIATES (COLLECTIVELY REFERRED TO HEREIN AS THE "SAMSUNG ENTITIES") EXPRESSLY DISCLAIM ANY AND ALL  
WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING ANY WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE,  
INTEROPERABILITY OR NON-INFRINGEMENT, WITH RESPECT TO INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY SECURITY PROTECTION, SAFE™  
DEVICES AND APPLICATIONS TESTED WITH SAFE™ DEVICES. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE SAMSUNG ENTITIES BE LIABLE FOR ANY  
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, PUNITIVE, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY KIND WHATSOEVER WITH RESPECT TO  
INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY SECURITY PROTECTION, SAFE™ DEVICES OR APPLICATIONS TESTED WITH SAFE™ DEVICES. In  
addition, information technology security protection will be affected by features or functionality associated with, among other  
things the e-mail platform, master data management, and virtual private network solutions selected by the software provider,  
solution provider or user. Choice of an e-mail, master data management, and virtual private network solution is at the sole  
discretion of the software provider, solution provider or user and any associated effect on information technology security  
protection is solely the responsibility of the software provider, solution provider or user. For complete statement of limited  
warranty, please refer to www.samsung.com/us/safe, available on the web and where Samsung smartphone and Galaxy Tab™  
devices are sold. [101212]  
Samsung Telecommunications America (STA), LLC  
Headquarters:  
Customer Care Center:  
1000 Klein Rd.  
1301 E. Lookout Drive  
Richardson, TX 75082  
Toll Free Tel:  
Plano, TX 75074  
1.888.987.HELP (4357)  
©2012 Samsung Telecommunications America, LLC. Samsung is a registered trademark of Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd.  
Do you have questions about your Samsung Mobile Phone? For 24 hour information and assistance, we offer a new FAQ/ARS  
System (Automated Response System) at: http://www.samsung.com/us/support.  
Nuance®, VSuite, T9® Text Input, and the Nuance logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Nuance Communications,  
Inc., or its affiliates in the United States and/or other countries.  
The Bluetooth® word mark, figure mark (stylized “B Design”), and combination mark (Bluetooth word mark and “B Design”) are  
registered trademarks and are wholly owned by the Bluetooth SIG.  
microSD™ and the microSD logo are Trademarks of the SD Card Association.  
Openwave® is a registered Trademark of Openwave, Inc.  
and  
are trademarks of SRS Labs, Inc. CS Headphone and WOW HD technologies are incorporated under license  
from SRS Labs, Inc.  
®
, DivX , DivX Certified® and associated logos are trademarks of Rovi Corporation or its subsidiaries and are used under  
TM  
license.  
DivX Certified® to play DivX® video up to HD 720p, including premium content.  
ABOUT DIVX VIDEO: DivX® is a digital video format created by DivX, LLC, a subsidiary of Rovi Corporation. This is an official DivX  
Certified® device that plays DivX video. Visit www.divx.com for more information and software tools to convert your files into DivX  
videos.  
ABOUT DIVX VIDEO-ON-DEMAND: This DivX Certified® device must be registered in order to play purchased DivX Video-on-  
Demand (VOD) movies. To obtain your registration code, locate the DivX VOD section in your device setup menu (tap Apps >  
Settings > About device > Legal information > License settings > DivX® VOD > Register). Go to vod.divx.com for more information on  
how to complete your registration.  
Google, the Google logo, Android, the Android logo, Google Play, Gmail, Google Mail, Google Maps, Google Music, Google Talk,  
Picasa, YouTube and other marks are trademarks of Google Inc.  
Wi-Fi is a registered trademark of the Wireless Fidelity Alliance, Inc.  
Swype and the Swype logos are trademarks of Swype, Inc. © 2010 Swype, Inc. All rights reserved.  
Devices purchased for use on AT&T's system are designed for use exclusively on AT&T's system. You agree that you won't make  
any modifications to the Equipment or programming to enable the Equipment to operate on any other system. A voice plan is  
required on all voice-capable devices, unless specifically noted otherwise in the terms governing your agreement. Some devices  
or plans may require you to subscribe to a data plan.  
Your phone is designed to make it easy for you to access a wide variety of content. For your protection, AT&T wants you to be  
aware that some applications that you enable may involve the location of your phone being shared. For applications available  
through AT&T, AT&T offers privacy controls that let you decide how an application may use the location of your phone and other  
phones on your account. However, AT&T's privacy tools do not apply to applications available outside of AT&T. Please review the  
terms and conditions and the associated privacy policy for each location-based service to learn how location information will be  
used and protected.  
Your phone may be used to access the Internet and to download, and/or purchase goods, applications, and services from AT&T or  
elsewhere from third parties. AT&T provides tools for you to control access to the Internet and certain Internet content. These  
controls may not be available for certain devices which bypass AT&T controls.  
AT&T may collect certain types of information from your device when you use AT&T services to provide customer support and to  
improve its services. For more information on AT&T's Privacy Policy, visit http://www.att.com/privacy  
.
Your phone features earSmart™, an intelligent voice processor that delivers a clear voice experience, allowing you to hear and be  
heard™ in nearly any environment. earSmart technology uses the science of human hearing to distinguish sounds, identify your  
voice and suppress surrounding noise, for clear conversations just about anywhere.  
How Does It Work?  
The earSmart voice processor in your phone captures your voice and all the sounds around you.  
Working like the human ear, it processes and distinguishes these sounds, isolates your voice conversation, and removes background noise -  
from both ends of a call.  
It also automatically equalizes and adjusts voice volume so you can hear and talk naturally, even in the noisiest places.  
With earSmart technology, you can talk where you want, and have clear conversations for mobile calls, video chats, even speakerphone calls,  
without worrying about surrounding noise.  
Table of Contents  
1
Section 5: Contacts and Your Address  
Book ..........................................................73  
2
Wi-Fi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164  
NFC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167  
Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168  
NFC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173  
3
4
Section 11: Health and Safety  
Information ............................................ 205  
Specific Absorption Rate (SAR) Certification  
Restricting Children's Access to Your  
Mobile Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225  
Section 13: Samsung Product  
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210  
FCC Hearing Aid Compatibility (HAC)  
Registration ............................................ 241  
Regulations for Wireless Devices . . . . . . . . . 223  
5
Section 1: Getting Started  
This section explains how to start using your phone by first  
configuring your hardware, activating your service, and then  
setting up your voice mail.  
2. Lift the cover up (2) and to the right of the phone.  
Setting Up Your Phone  
Prior to use it is necessary to install both the battery and SIM  
into their corresponding internal compartments. The  
microSD™ card slot is also located in this same internal  
area.  
1. Remove the back cover by inserting a fingernail into  
the slot on the top of your phone (1).  
Caution! Do not bend or twist the back cover excessively.  
Doing so may damage the cover.  
Installing the SIM Card  
When you subscribe to a cellular network, you are provided  
with a plug-in SIM card loaded with your subscription details,  
such as your PIN, available optional services, and many  
others features.  
Getting Started  
6
         
Important! The plug-in SIM card information and its contacts  
can be easily damaged by scratching or bending,  
so be careful when handling, inserting, or  
removing the card. Keep all SIM cards out of reach  
of small children.  
Note: If the card is not inserted correctly, the phone will not  
detect the SIM card. Re-orient the card back into the slot  
if the SIM is not detected.  
Installing the Battery  
1. Insert the battery into the opening on the back of the  
phone, making sure the connectors align (1).  
2. Gently press down to secure the battery (2).  
Carefully slide the SIM card into the SIM card socket  
(as shown) until the card locks into place.  
Make sure that the card’s gold contacts face into the phone  
and that the upper-left angled corner of the card is positioned  
as shown.  
Correct  
Incorrect  
7
   
Removing and Installing the Memory Card  
You can use a microSD(SD) or microSDHCcard to  
expand available memory space if you desire. This secure  
digital card enables you to exchange images, music, and  
data between SD-compatible devices. This type of memory  
card is designed for use with this mobile phone and other  
devices.  
Correct  
Note: Your phone has been tested to support up to a 64GB  
memory card.  
Installing the Memory Card  
For more information on Memory Cards, see “Memory Card”  
Push the microSD card into the slot until it clicks (as  
shown).  
Removing the Memory Card  
1. Push on the memory card until it clicks and is released.  
2. Grasp the memory card and remove it from the phone.  
Make sure the microSD’s gold contact pins face downward and  
the card is securely inserted.  
Getting Started  
8
           
2. Press along the edge of the back cover (3) until you  
Installing the Back Cover  
1. Place the battery cover onto the back of the phone (1)  
and press down (2).  
have a secure seal.  
Note: Make sure the battery is properly installed before  
switching on the phone.  
Charging a Battery  
Your device is powered by a rechargeable Li-ion battery. The  
Travel Charger that is used to charge the battery, is included  
with your device. Use only Samsung-approved batteries and  
chargers.  
9
     
Note: You must fully charge the battery before using your  
phone for the first time. A discharged battery recharges  
fully in approximately 4 hours.  
Correct  
Note: Long backlight settings, searching for service, vibrate  
mode, web browser use, and other variables may  
reduce the battery’s talk and standby times.  
Although you can use the phone while the battery is  
charging, doing so will require additional charging time.  
Incorrect  
Using the Travel Charger  
Important! Verify that the handset battery is installed prior to  
connection. If the battery is not properly installed  
and the wall charger is connected, the handset  
may power off and on continuously, preventing  
proper operation.  
1. Plug the flat end of the Travel Charger into the Power/  
Accessory Interface connector and the other end into a  
standard AC wall outlet.  
2. When charging is finished, remove the flat end from  
the interface connector jack on the phone.  
Getting Started  
10  
 
Switching the Phone On or Off  
Warning! If your handset has a touch screen display, please  
note that a touch screen responds best to a light  
touch from the pad of your finger. Using excessive  
force or a metallic object when pressing on the touch  
screen may damage the tempered glass surface and  
1. Press and hold  
until the phone switches  
on.  
Note: Failure to unplug the wall charger before you remove the  
battery, can cause damage to the phone.  
Low Battery Indicator  
When the battery is weak and only a few minutes of talk time  
remain, the battery icon ( ) blinks and the device sounds a  
warning tone at regular intervals. In this condition, your  
phone conserves its remaining battery power, not by turning  
off the backlight, but by entering the dimming mode. For a  
quick check of your battery level, glance at the battery  
charge indicator located in the upper-right corner of your  
device’s display. Solid color ( ) indicates a full charge.  
2. Swipe your finger across the screen to unlock the  
phone.  
Note: The display language is preset to English at the factory.  
To change the language, use the Language menu. For  
When the battery level becomes too low, the phone  
automatically turns off.  
11  
         
3. To switch off the phone, press and hold  
until the Device options screen displays.  
4. Tap Power off to switch off the phone.  
,
Touch Cancel to set up your phone later. You can  
access Ready2Go by tapping Applications  
Ready2Go  
AT&T  
.
5. At the Power off prompt, tap OK  
.
3. Read and follow the instructions on each screen.  
Locking and Unlocking the Touch  
Screen  
Creating a Samsung Account  
An active Samsung account is required to begin accessing  
applications such as ChatON and AllShare Play. If you did not  
create a Samsung account when you first set up your phone,  
follow these steps:  
1. Press  
to lock the touch screen.  
again to display the lock screen then  
2. Press  
swipe your finger across the screen to unlock.  
1. From the home screen, tap  
Add account  
2. Tap Samsung account  
3. Tap Create new account  
Settings  
Setting up your Phone with Ready2Go  
When you turn on your phone for the first time, you will be  
prompted to setup the AT&T Ready2Go feature.  
.
.
.
AT&T Ready2Go allows you to quickly and easily setup your  
phone by using the web browser on your PC. You can set-up  
email accounts, import contacts, set wallpaper, configure  
Wi-Fi and many more features.  
1. When the Fast & Easy Phone Set-Up screen displays,  
tap Select Language if you want to change the default  
language.  
4. Tap Terms and conditions to read them and tap OK  
.
5. Tap the I accept all the terms above checkbox.  
6. Tap Privacy policy and read the policy and tap OK  
7. Tap Agree  
8. Enter the required information and tap Sign up  
9. At the Welcome screen, tap Next  
.
.
.
.
2. Touch Get Started to begin.  
10. Follow the on-screen instructions to verify your email  
– or –  
address and activate your account.  
Getting Started  
12  
                 
Creating a New Google Account  
Retrieving your Google Account  
Password  
A Google account password is required for Google  
applications. If you misplace or forget your Google Account  
password, follow these instructions to retrieve it:  
1. From your computer, use an Internet browser and  
In order to utilize your device to the fullest extent, you will  
need to create a Google™ Account when you first use your  
device. With a Google Account, Google applications will  
always be in sync between your phone and computer.  
If you did not create a new account during the setup  
procedure when you first turned your phone on, follow these  
steps:  
2. Click on the Can’t access your account? link.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Gmail  
.
3. Tap the I don’t know my password radio button.  
The Add a Google Account screen displays.  
4. Enter your Email address and click Continue  
.
2. Tap New to create a new Google account.  
5. Follow the password recovery procedure.  
– or –  
Setting Up Your Voice Mail  
If you already have a Google account, tap Existing to  
sign in and add the account to your phone.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
, then tap  
.
2. Follow the tutorial to create a password, record a  
3. Follow the on-screen instructions to add a Google  
greeting, and record your name.  
Account.  
Note: These steps may be different depending on your  
Note: Once you have created a Google account, you only need  
network.  
to sign in.  
13  
           
Accessing Your Voice Mail  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
, then tap  
.
You may be prompted to enter a password.  
2. When connected, follow the voice prompts from the  
voice mail center.  
Accessing Your Voice Mail From Another Phone  
1. Dial your wireless phone number.  
2. When you hear your voicemail greeting, press the  
asterisk key on the phone you are using.  
3. Enter your password.  
Getting Started  
14  
   
Section 2: Understanding Your Phone  
This section outlines some key features of your phone and  
describes the screen and the icons that appear when the phone  
is in use. It also shows how to navigate through the phone and  
provides information on using a memory card.  
8 Megapixel camera and camcorder with 2 Megapixel Front  
Facing camera  
AT&T GPS Navigation functionality provides real-time navigation  
HSDPA 7.2 mbps high speed download capability  
Up to 32 GB expandable memory slot  
Features of Your Phone  
Your phone is lightweight, easy-to-use and offers many  
useful features. The following list outlines a few of the  
features included in your phone.  
16 GB memory and 2 GB RAM  
Corporate and Personal Email  
Sync and update social network applications  
Over 450,000 Apps available to download via Google Play  
Store™  
4G LTE network with 1.5 gigahertz quad-core processor  
Android v 4.1.1, Jelly Bean Platform  
Brilliant 5.5” HD sAMOLED plus display  
Touch screen provides quick response to a variety of in-phone  
menus and options including applications and seven home  
screens  
Access to Movies and TV Shows with Samsung Media Hub  
Full Integration of Google Mobile™ Services (Gmail, YouTube,  
Google Maps, Google Voice Search)  
Multiple Messaging Options: Text/Picture/Video Messaging, and  
Instant Messaging with Google Talk™  
Virtual (on-screen) QWERTY keyboard  
Ready access to the Internet  
®
®
®
DivX Certified to play DivX video up to HD 1080p, including  
premium content  
Built-in Bluetooth and advanced Wi-Fi technology  
USB Tethering-capable  
AllShare™ Play to share your media content across DLNA  
certified devices  
Mobile Hotspot Capability  
15  
       
1. Status light: displays red when charging, green when  
fully charged, blue when powering up, and orange  
when a notification has arrived.  
Front View of Your Phone  
13  
1
2. External speaker: allows you to hear the caller.  
3. Application icons: you can place shortcuts to your  
favorite applications on the Home screen.  
4. Primary shortcuts: allows quick access to important  
features such as Phone, Contacts, Messaging, Internet,  
12  
11  
2
10  
9
3
4
5. Menu key: allows you to access sub-menus with  
additional options for different features and  
applications such as Home screen, Phone, Contacts,  
Messaging, and Web.  
8
6. Home key: allows you to return to the main Home  
screen from any Home screen or menu. Press and hold  
to display Recent apps, Task Manager, and Google  
Search. Quickly press twice to activate the S Voice  
application.  
5
6
7
7. Back key: allows you step backwards when navigating  
a menu or web page.  
Understanding Your Phone  
16  
     
8. Home screen indicator: shows which Home screen is  
presently displayed.  
Side Views of Your Phone  
1
6
9. Google Quick Search bar: a shortcut to Google Search  
that allows you to search for items on the internet.  
10. AccuWeather screen: displays Time, Day, Date,  
Temperature and weather conditions for your area.  
11. Indicator icons: shows the information needed to  
operate your phone, such as the received signal  
strength, phone battery level, time, unread Emails,  
missed calls, etc.  
5
2
12. Front facing camera: allows you to take pictures of  
yourself when you set the camera shooting mode to  
Self shot.  
13. Proximity and Light sensors: uses the ambient light  
level to adjust keypad access. If the light path is  
blocked, for example, when holding the phone close to  
your ear, the touch screen will turn off.  
3
4
17  
     
1. 3.5mm Headset jack: allows you to plug in headphones.  
2. Volume keys: allow you to adjust the ringer volume  
while in standby mode or adjust the voice volume  
during a call. When receiving an incoming call, briefly  
Rear View of Your Phone  
1
4
press down either volume key (  
) to mute  
the ring tone. Adjusts text size when reading a  
message.  
3. Microphone: allows other callers to hear you when you  
are speaking to them. It is also used for the  
Speakerphone.  
4. Power/Accessory Interface connector: allows you to  
connect a Travel Charger or other optional accessories  
such as a USB/data cable or a hands-free headset for  
convenient, hands-free conversations.  
2
3
5. Power/Lock key: (  
) lets you power your  
1. Camera lens: is used to take pictures and shoot videos.  
2. External speaker: allows you to hear when the  
Speakerphone is turned on.  
phone on and off. Also allows you to lock or unlock the  
touch screen. For more information on locking your  
3. S Pen: a stylus that assists you in performing different  
functions.  
6. Microphone: used for noise cancellation and stereo  
recording.  
4. Flash: is used to provide adequate light when taking  
pictures in dark places.  
Understanding Your Phone  
18  
     
Rich S Pen Functionality  
S Pen  
Air View: Hover S Pen over the screen to preview information.  
Effectively express yourself: Write/Draw directly into an email,  
or the calendar, annotate Word, Excel, PowerPoint, and PDF  
documents, capture your ideas in S Note, write a note on the back  
of the picture.  
The S Pen is a stylus that assists you in performing different  
functions. By using the Pen button, you can minimize having  
to switch between touch and pen input.  
1
Quick Command: Launch Quick Command to activate frequently  
used applications or actions. Press the S Pen button and then  
drag the S Pen up the screen to display the Quick Command  
window.  
2
Easy Clip: Instantly outline and crop anything on the screen and  
freely edit or share with others.  
1. Pen button: by pressing the Pen button, you can add  
functionality to the S Pen. For more information, refer  
to “Using the S Pen” on page 20.  
2. Stylus tip: the tip of the S Pen is used for tapping the  
screen.  
19  
   
Removing the S Pen from your Phone  
The S Pen is stored in your phone to make it easier to keep  
Using the S Pen  
There are several different functions you can perform by  
track of.  
using the S Pen.  
Back Button  
To remove the S Pen, follow these steps:  
1. Use your fingernail or a sharp object to pull the end of  
the S Pen out of the phone (1).  
To move to a previous screen, hold the S Pen button and  
touch and drag the screen as shown in the illustration below.  
The previous screen displays.  
Press S Pen  
Button  
2. Pull the S Pen out of the phone (2).  
Understanding Your Phone  
20  
Menu Button  
Launch S Note Lite  
To display the menu from any screen, hold the S Pen button  
and touch and drag the screen as shown in the illustration  
below. The menu displays.  
S Note Lite is an application that you can launch from any  
screen to take quick notes or jot down ideas. To open S Note  
Lite, hold the S Pen button and double-tap the screen.  
Press  
S Pen  
button  
Press  
S Pen  
button  
To access the full S Note application, see “S Note” on  
21  
Screen Capture  
Write on any Screen after Capture  
To take a screen capture, hold the S Pen button and tap and  
hold the S Pen anywhere on the screen. Files are saved in  
To write on a screen capture, use the pen to draw or write.  
Files are saved in the My Files  
All files  
sdcard0  
the My Files  
All files  
sdcard0  
Pictures  
Pictures  
Screenshots  
IMG_edited folder.  
Screenshots folder. You can also find them in your Gallery in  
the Screenshots album.  
Press and Hold  
S Pen button  
Draw or Write  
For information on using your S Pen with the S Note  
Understanding Your Phone  
22  
You can change the Phone, Messaging, S Note, and Internet  
application shortcuts to any icon that is displayed in the Apps  
menu.  
Air view  
When you hold the S Pen near the screen, a pointer appears  
on the screen. Move the pointer to files, subjects, or options  
to preview the contents or view information in pop-up  
windows.  
Indicator Icons  
This list identifies the symbols you’ll see on your phone’s  
You can scroll through panels or lists by moving the pointer  
to an edge (top/bottom/left/right) of the screen.  
display and Indicator area:  
Display Layout  
Displays your current signal strength. The greater  
the number of bars, the stronger the signal.  
Your display screen provides a wealth of information about  
the phone’s status and options, as well as providing access  
Indicates that the Airplane Mode is active. You  
cannot send or receive any calls or access online  
information.  
Primary Shortcuts  
There are four non-movable Application Shortcuts that  
appear at the bottom of all Home screens. The default  
shortcuts are:  
Displays when there is no SIM card in the phone.  
Displays when there is no network available.  
Displays when your phone is in Blocking mode.  
Phone  
for dialing a number.  
for creating and viewing Messages.  
Messaging  
S Note  
for creating notes using the keypad or S Pen  
for surfing the Internet.  
.
Internet  
Apps  
for accessing the applications on your phone.  
23  
       
Displays when there is a system error or alert.  
Displays when your battery is charging. Also  
displays battery charge level.  
Device Power Very Low – Shows your current  
battery only has between 5 and 15 percent power  
remaining.  
Displays when the S pen has been removed from  
the phone.  
Displays when a call is in progress.  
DevicePowerCriticalShowsyourcurrentbattery  
only has less than 5 percent power remaining and  
will immediately shutdown.  
Displays when a call is on hold.  
DisplayswhenyourconnectiontoanEDGEnetwork  
is active.  
Displays when the speakerphone is on.  
Displays when your phone is communicating with  
the EDGE network.  
Displays when a call has been missed.  
Displays when a call has been muted.  
Displayswhenyourconnection to a UTMS, HSDPA,  
HSPA, or HSPA+ network is active.  
Displays when your phone is communicating with  
the UTMS, HSDPA, HSPA, or HSPA+ network.  
Displays when Call forwarding is set to Always  
Displayswhenyourconnectiontoa4GLTEnetwork  
is active.  
Displays your battery charge level. Icon shown is  
fully charged.  
Understanding Your Phone  
24  
Displays when your phone is communicating with  
the 4G LTE network.  
Displays when Email is received.  
DisplayswhenthetimeanddateforaCalendarEvent  
Displays when your phone is downloading or has  
downloaded a file. It will blink green when it is  
installing.  
Displayswhenyousetanalarmtoringataspecified  
Displays when the an outbound file transfer is in  
progress.  
Displays when a Play Store download has  
completed.  
Displays when the Sound profile is set to Mute.  
Displays when the Sound profile is set to Vibrate.  
Displays when Bluetooth is activated.  
Displays when updates are available for download.  
Displays when the phone is connected to a  
computer via a supported USB cable connection.  
Displays when a Bluetooth device has been paired  
with the phone.  
Displays when the phone is tethered via a  
supported USB cable connection.  
Displays when a new text or multimedia message  
is received.  
Displays when Wi-Fi is connected, active, and  
communicating with a Wireless Access Point  
(WAP).  
Displays when a new voice mail is received.  
25  
Displays when Wi-Fi is active but there is a  
communication issue with the target Wireless  
Access Point (WAP).  
Displays when your phone is connecting to the  
Device Management server when you first turn on  
your phone.  
DisplayswhenWi-FiDirectisactiveandyourphone  
is connected to another device.  
Displayswhenyourdeviceisconnectedbeingused  
to control streaming media and is connected to a  
Digital Living Network Alliance (DLNA) certified  
device using the AllShare Play application.  
Displays when your phone as been configured as a  
portable Wi-Fi hotspot.  
Displays when a file is being uploaded or sync’d  
between your device and an external Web storage  
location.  
Displays when your phone is connected to a PC  
using Kies air.  
Displayswhen the uploadedor transferred filewas  
successfully delivered.  
Displayswhen your phone is connectedto a Digital  
Living Network Alliance (DLNA) certified device  
using the AllShare Play application.  
Displays when TTY device has been inserted.  
Displays when a screen capture has been taken.  
Displays when the keypad is active.  
DisplayswhenGPSis active and acquiring asignal.  
Displays when data synchronization and  
application sync is active and synchronization is in  
progress for Gmail, Calendar, and Contacts.  
Displays when an emergency call is taking place.  
Understanding Your Phone  
26  
For more details on configuring your phone’s settings, see  
AllShare Play: AllShare Play allows your phone to  
stream photos, music and videos from its memory to  
other Digital Living Network Alliance (DLNA) certified  
devices. Your phone can also play digital content  
streamed from other DLNA certified devices. For more  
Application Icons  
The Apps menu provides quick access to the items you use  
most frequently.  
The following table contains a description of each  
application. If the application is already described in another  
section of this user manual, then a cross reference to that  
particular section is provided.  
AT&T Code Scanner: AT&T Code Scanner allows you to  
scan 2D (QR and datamatrix codes) and 1D (UPC and  
EAN)barcodesfoundinmagazines,stores,andonline.  
For information on navigating through the Apps icons, see  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
, then tap one of the  
AT&T FamilyMap:providespeaceofmindbybeingable  
to conveniently locate a family member from your  
wireless phone or PC and know that your family's  
location information is secure and private. For more  
application icons.  
2. Follow the on-screen instructions.  
3. To return to the main Home screen, tap  
The following applications are available:  
.
AT&T Locker: AT&T Locker allows you to store, share,  
and sync all of your photos, videos, and documents in  
one safe, convenient place; the AT&T cloud. For more  
27  
 
AT&T Navigator: AT&T Navigator provides you with  
access to real-time GPS-driven applications. These  
programs not only allow you to achieve turn-by-turn  
navigation, but also access local searches based on a  
variety of category parameters. For more information,  
Calculator:Usingthisfeatureyoucanusethephoneas  
a calculator. The calculator provides the basic  
arithmetic functions; addition, subtraction,  
multiplication, and division. You can also use this as a  
AT&T Ready2Go:AT&TReady2Go allows you to quickly  
and easily setup your phone by using the web browser  
on your PC. You can set-up email accounts, import  
contacts, set wallpaper, configure Wi-Fi and many  
Calendar: With the Calendar application, you can  
consultthecalendarbyday, week,month,year, create  
events, and set an alarm to act as a reminder, if  
Camera: Use your 8.0 megapixel camera feature to  
AT&T Smart Wi-Fi: With AT&T Smart Wi-Fi, you can  
maximize your battery performance, maximize your  
data, simplify access to AT&T Hot Spots and Wi-Fi  
networks,automateyourWi-Ficonnections,andtrack  
ChatON: With the ChatON application, you can interact  
withfriendsandfamilywithtext,images,hand-written  
notes and video shared instantly. You can also chat in  
Understanding Your Phone  
28  
   
Clock: The Clock application allows you to access  
alarms, view the World Clock, set a stopwatch, use a  
timer, and setup a Desk Clock. For more information,  
Email: Email enables you to review and create email  
using various email services. You can alsoreceive text  
message alerts when you receive an important email.  
Contacts: You can manage your daily contacts by  
storing their name and number in your Address Book.  
Address Book entries can be sorted by name, entry, or  
group. You can also synchronize your phone Address  
Book with AT&T Address Book, the network backup  
Flipboard: This application creates a personalized  
digital magazine out of everything being shared with  
you. Access news stories, personal feeds and other  
Gallery: The Gallery is where you view photos and play  
back videos. For photos, you can also perform basic  
editing tasks, view a slideshow, set photos as  
wallpaper or contact image, and share as a picture  
DeviceHelp:DeviceHelpprovidesonlineinformationto  
helpwithyourdevicequestions.Formoreinformation,  
Downloads: The Downloads application allows you to  
manage all of your downloads from the Play Store and  
Gmail: Gmail is a web-based email service. Gmail is  
configured when you first set up your phone.  
Depending on your synchronization settings, Gmail  
can automatically synchronize with your Gmail  
29  
   
Google: The Google Search application is the same on-  
screen Internet search engine that is on the Google  
Search Bar on your main Home screen. For more  
Kies air: Kies air allows you to sync your Windows PC  
wirelessly with your phone provided they are both on  
thesameWi-Finetwork.Youcanviewcalllogs,videos,  
photos, bookmarks, IMs, and even send SMS  
messages from your home computer. For more  
Google+:Google+makesmessagingandsharingwith  
your friends a lot easier. You can set up Circles of  
friends, visit the Stream to get updates from your  
Circles, use Messenger for fast messaging with  
everyone in your Circles, or use Instant Upload to  
automatically upload videos and photos to your own  
Latitude:WithGoogleLatitude,youcanseethelocation  
of all of your friends on a map or on a list. You can also  
shareorhideyourlocation.Formoreinformation,refer  
Local: Local is an application that uses Google Maps  
and your location to help you find Restaurants, Cafes,  
Bars,Attractions,andmore.Youcanalsoaddyourown  
Internet: Open the web browser to start surfing the  
web. The browser is fully optimized and comes with  
advanced functionality to enhance the Internet  
browsingfeatureonyourphone.Formoreinformation,  
Maps:Dependingonyourlocation,youcanviewbasic,  
custom, and satellite maps and local business  
information, including locations, contact information,  
and driving directions. You can also post public  
messages about a location and track your friends. For  
Understanding Your Phone  
30  
MediaHub:SamsungMediaHubisyouronestopforthe  
hottestmovieandTVcontent.Youcanrentorpurchase  
your favorite content and watch from the convenience  
Music Hub: This app lets you upload your music  
collection to the cloud, stream and purchase songs  
fromanextensivecatalog,andlistentopersonalradio.  
Music Player: Music Player allows you to play music  
files that you have stored on your phone and memory  
card. You can also create playlists. For more  
Messages:AT&TMessagesbringsyourtexts,calls,and  
voicemail messages together into a single  
conversation thread and is accessible by phone or  
My Files: My Files allows you to manage your sounds,  
images,videos,bluetoothfiles,Androidfiles,andother  
memorycarddatainoneconvenientlocation.Formore  
Messaging:Youcansendandreceivedifferenttypesof  
myAT&T:myAT&TallowsyoutomanageyourownAT&T  
account. You can review and pay your bill, check  
minutes and data usage, upgrade to a new device, or  
Messenger: Messenger allows you to bring groups of  
friends together into a simple group conversation.  
When you get a new conversation in Messenger,  
Google+ sends an update to your phone. For more  
Navigation: Navigation is an internet-connected GPS  
navigationsystemwithvoiceguidance.Youcantypeor  
Mobile Hotspot: This application allows you to share  
your phones’s mobile data connection as a portable  
31  
 
Paper Artist: Provides access to an in-device graphics  
PlayMusic:WiththeMusicapplication,whileonline,youcan  
play music that you have added to your music file as well as  
any music you copied from your PC. While offline, you can  
listen to music you have copied from your PC. For more  
Phone: Allows you to access the dialer keypad, call  
Play Store: The Play Store provides access to  
downloadable applications and games to install on  
Polaris Office 4.0: Polaris® Office 4.0 is a Microsoft  
Office compatible office suite. This application  
providesacentralplaceformanagingyourdocuments  
Play Books: With Google Play Books, you can find  
more than 3 million free e-books and hundreds of  
thousands more to buy in the eBookstore. For more  
Play Magazines: With Google Play Magazines, you can  
subscribe to your favorite magazines and have them  
available to read on your phone at any time or any  
S Note: The S Note application allows you to create  
notesusingthekeypad,theSPentool,orboth.Youcan  
addimages,voicerecordings,andtextallinoneplace.  
PlayMovies&TV:WithGooglePlayMovies&TV,youcan  
rent thousands of different movies and television  
shows. You can watch instantly, or download your  
movie or show for offline viewing at a later time. For  
Understanding Your Phone  
32  
 
S Suggest: This application recommends popular  
applications when connected to a Wi-Fi network. All  
recommended applications are guaranteed to be  
compatible with your device. For more information,  
Video Player: The Video Player application plays video  
files stored on your microSD card. For more  
Voice Recorder: The Voice Recorder allows you to  
record an audio file up to one minute long and then  
immediately send it as a message. For more  
S Voice: With the S Voice application you can use your  
voice to perform operations that you would normally  
have to do by hand such as dialing a phone number,  
texting a message, playing music, etc. For more  
Voice Search: The Google Voice Search application  
allowsyoutosearchthewebusingonlyyourvoice.For  
Settings: This icon navigates to the sound and phone  
settings for your phone. It includes such settings as:  
display, security, memory, and any extra settings  
associated with your phone. For more information,  
YouTube: YouTube is a video sharing website on which  
users can upload and share videos, and view them in  
Talk: Google Talk is a free Windows and web-based  
application for instant messaging offered by Google.  
Conversation logs are automatically saved to a Chats  
area in your Gmail account. This allows you to search  
a chat log and store them in your Gmail accounts. For  
YPmobile: The YPmobile (Yellowpages) application  
provides quick and ready access to businesses, map  
locations, and storage of your favorite searches. This  
application allows you to tap into local businesses,  
locations,andevents,connectingyoutoyoursearchin  
33  
       
Command Keys  
Tip: To open applications quickly, add the icons of frequently-  
used applications to the Home screen or to the folders you  
Menu Key  
Press  
Menu to display a context-sensitive menu of  
options for the current screen or feature.  
Home Key  
Press  
Home to display the main Home screen. Press  
Google Search Bar  
and hold to display recently used apps and access the Task  
manager.  
Back Key  
Press  
step.  
The Google Search Bar provides you an on-screen Internet  
search engine powered by Google™.  
1. From the main home screen, tap the Google Search bar  
.
Back to return to the previous screen, option or  
2. Use the on-screen keypad to enter the item you want  
Terms used in this user manual  
Tap  
Lightly touch items to select or launch them. For example:  
to search for, then tap  
3. Tap to use Google Voice Search. Follow the  
on-screen instructions.  
.
Tap the on screen keyboard to enter characters or text.  
Tap a menu item to select it.  
Menu Navigation  
You can tailor the phone’s range of functions to fit your needs  
using both menus and widgets. Menus, sub-menus, and  
features can be accessed by scrolling through the available  
on-screen menus. Your phone originally has three home  
screens but you can expand up to seven home screens.  
Tap an application’s icon to launch the application.  
Touch and Hold  
Activate on-screen items by a touch and hold gesture. For  
example:  
Touch and hold a widget on the home screen to move it.  
Understanding Your Phone  
34  
                 
Touch and hold on a field to display a pop-up menu of options.  
Turn over  
Swipe and Palm Swipe  
To swipe, lightly drag your finger vertically or horizontally  
across the screen. Use swipe when:  
Turn your phone over so that the screen faces downward. For  
example:  
Mute incoming calls and playing sounds by turning your phone  
over.  
Unlocking the screen  
Scrolling through the Home screen or a menu  
Using Gestures  
To palm swipe, swipe the side of your hand horizontally  
across the screen. Use palm swipe when:  
By activating the various gesture features within the Motion  
Settings menu, you can access a variety of time saving  
functions.  
Capturing the screen  
To activate motion:  
Panning  
1. From the Home screen, press  
Settings Motion  
2. Tap the ON/OFF icon  
the screen to activate motion.  
and then tap  
To pan, touch and hold a selected icon, then move the device  
to the left or right to reposition it to another page. You must  
first activate Motion on your device. Use panning to:  
.
located at the top of  
ON  
Move icons on your Home screens or Application Menus to  
another page.  
3. Tap the checkboxes located to the right of each motion  
option to activate the motions you wish. A checkmark  
will appear.  
Tilt  
To activate the tilt feature, press and hold two points on the  
screen then tilt the device back and forth to reduce or  
enlarge the screen. Use tilt to:  
Reduce or enlarge the screen in the Gallery or Browser.  
35  
     
Pan to move icon: Once enabled, touch and hold a desired  
application shortcut icon or widget on the screen. Once it  
detaches, move the device left or right to migrate it to a new  
location.  
Caution! Excessive shaking or impact to the device may cause  
unintended results. To learn how to properly control  
motions, tap  
Settings  
Motion  
Learn  
about motions  
.
Pan to browse images: Once enabled, touch and hold a desired  
on-screen image to pan around it. Move the device left or right to  
pan vertically or up and down to pan horizontally around the large  
on-screen image.  
The following is a description of the available gestures:  
Quick glance: Once enable, you can check key information at a  
glance by reaching towards your device.  
Shake to update: Once enabled, shake your device to rescan for  
Bluetooth devices, rescan for Wi-Fi devices, Refresh a Web page,  
etc.  
Direct call: Once enabled, the device will dial the currently  
displayed on-screen Contact entry as soon as you place the  
device to your ear.  
Turn over to mute/pause: Once enabled, mute incoming calls  
and any playing sounds by turning the device display down on a  
surface. This is the opposite of the Pickup to be Notified Gesture.  
Smart alert: Once enabled, pickup the device to be alerted and  
notified of you have missed any calls or messages.  
Double tap to top: Once enabled, double tap the top of the  
device to be taken to the top of the current on-screen list.  
Tilt to zoom: Once enabled, you must be on a screen where  
content can be zoomed. In a single motion, touch and hold two  
points on the display then tilt the tilt the device back and forth to  
zoom in or out.  
Understanding Your Phone  
36  
     
Palm swipe to capture: Once enabled, you can capture any  
on-screen information swiping across the screen. In a single  
motion, press the side of your hand on the screen and swipe form  
left to right. The image is then copied to the clipboard.  
Locking and Unlocking the Phone  
To unlock your phone:  
1. Press the lock button  
located on the upper  
right side of your phone.  
2. The lock screen will display with Swipe screen to  
unlock displayed at the bottom of the screen.  
3. Swipe the touch screen in any direction.  
4. The Home screen will display as shown above.  
Note: There are several additional ways you can lock your  
Palm Swipe to  
Screen Capture  
Home Screen Overview  
The main home screen is the starting point for many  
applications and functions, and it allows you to add items  
like application icons, shortcuts, folders, or Google widgets  
to give you instant access to information and applications.  
This is the default page and accessible from any menu by  
Palm touch to mute/pause: Once enabled, you can pause any  
on-screen video or mute any current sound by simply covering  
the screen with your hand. Once you remove your hand from the  
screen, the device goes back to normal by either continuing to  
play the current video or unmuting the current sound.  
pressing  
.
37  
     
Navigating Through the Home Screens  
Your phone originally has three home screens but you can  
expand up to seven home screens. If you like, you can place  
different applications on each of the home screens.  
Navigating Through the Application Menus  
Your phone initially has three Application Menus available.  
Follow these steps to navigate through the Application  
Menus:  
1. At the Home screen, tap  
. The first Application  
From the main Home screen, sweep the screen with  
your finger in either direction. The main Home Screen  
is located in the middle with a Home screen on each  
side.  
Menu will be displayed.  
2. Sweep the screen left or right to access the other two  
menus.  
3. Tap one of the application icons.  
Understanding Your Phone  
38  
 
2. Tap an option.  
Note: As you add applications, the number of Application  
menus that you have available will increase.  
Navigating Using Sub-Menus  
Sub-menus are available when you are at any Home screen  
or have selected a feature or application such as Phone,  
Contacts, Messaging, or Internet.  
Sub-Menu items  
To access a sub-menu:  
1. Press  
.
A sub-menu will appear at the bottom of the phone  
screen.  
Accessing Recently-Used Apps  
1. Press and hold  
from any screen to open the  
recently-used applications window.  
2. Tap an icon to open the selected application.  
– or –  
Tap  
to go to the Task manager.  
– or –  
39  
Tap  
to go to Google Search.  
3. Tap  
to display your current applications.  
4. Scroll through the list and locate your desired  
application.  
Customizing Your Home Screen  
You can customize your Home screen by doing the following:  
5. Touch and hold the application icon. This creates an  
immediate shortcut of the selected icon and closes the  
Apps tab.  
Creating Shortcuts  
Adding and Removing Widgets on the Home Screen  
Repositioning Widgets  
6. While still holding the on-screen icon, position it on the  
current page. Once complete, release the screen to  
lock the new shortcut into its new position on the  
current screen.  
Creating Folders  
Changing the Wallpaper  
Adding and Deleting Home Screens  
Creating Shortcuts  
Shortcuts are different than the current Home screen  
Widgets that only launch an application. Shortcuts activate a  
feature, action, or launch an application.  
Adding a shortcut via the Add to Home screen  
1. Press  
to activate the main Home screen.  
2. Navigate to the desired Home Page.  
3. Touch and hold on an empty area of the Home screen.  
4. Tap Apps and widgets Folder, or Page.  
,
Note: To move a shortcut from one screen to another, it must  
first be deleted from its current screen. Navigate to the  
new screen, then add the shortcut.  
5. Press and hold a shortcut from the available list and  
position it on the current screen.  
Deleting a shortcut  
Adding a shortcut from the Apps Menu  
1. Press  
to activate the main Home screen.  
1. Press  
to activate the main Home screen.  
2. Touch and hold the desired shortcut. This unlocks it  
2. Navigate to the desired Home Page.  
from its location on the current screen.  
Understanding Your Phone  
40  
   
3. Drag the icon over the Delete icon  
and release it.  
Adding and Removing Widgets  
As you place the shortcut into the Trash, both items  
turn red.  
Widgets are self-contained applications that reside in either  
your Widgets tab or on the main or extended Home screens.  
Unlike a shortcut, the Widget appears as an on-screen  
application.  
Note: This action does not delete the shortcut, it just removes  
it from the current screen.  
Adding a Widget  
1. Press  
to activate the main Home screen.  
Adding and Removing Primary Shortcuts  
2. Navigate to the desired Home Page.  
You can change any of your primary shortcuts with the  
3. Touch and hold on an empty area of the screen.  
exception of the Apps  
shortcut.  
4. Tap Apps and Widgets  
.
1. Press to activate the main Home screen.  
5. Tap the Widgets tab at the top of the screen.  
6. Press and hold an available Widget to position it on the  
current screen, then release the Widget.  
Removing a Widget  
2. Touch and hold the primary shortcut you want to  
replace, then drag it to an empty space on any Home  
screen.  
3. Scroll through the App menu to find the shortcut you  
want to add as the new primary short cut.  
4. Touch and hold the new shortcut, then drag it to the  
empty space in the row of primary shortcuts.  
The new primary shortcut will now appear on all Home  
screens.  
1. Touch and hold a Widget until you can move it around  
on the screen.  
2. Drag the Widget over the Delete icon  
and release  
it.  
As you place the Widget into the Trash, both items turn  
red.  
41  
 
Creating Application Folders  
You can create application folders to hold similar applications  
if you wish.  
Note: This action does not actually delete the Widget, it just  
removes it from the current Home screen.  
To create a folder follow these steps:  
Moving Icons in the Apps Menu  
1. Press  
to activate the main Home screen.  
to display your current applications.  
1. Press  
to activate the main Home screen.  
2. Tap  
2. Tap  
to display your current applications.  
3. Tap the Apps tab at the top of the screen if it is not  
3. Tap the Apps tab at the top of the screen if it is not  
already selected.  
already selected.  
4. Press  
and tap Edit.  
4. Press  
and tap View type.  
5. Touch and hold the first application that you would like  
5. Tap Customizable grid. A green circle will appear next  
to move to a folder.  
to the option.  
+
6. Drag the icon down to the Create folder  
7. Enter a folder name and tap OK  
icon.  
6. Press  
and tap Edit.  
.
7. Scroll through the list and locate the icon you wish to  
move.  
A folder is displayed in the original place of the  
application icon with the application icon displayed on  
top of it. You can now drag other Apps into the folder.  
8. Touch and drag the icon to the position that you want.  
To move to a different page, drag the icon to the edge  
of the page until the page scrolls to the desired page.  
8. To view information on an App, drag the App icon up to  
the App info  
application.  
icon to view information on the  
9. Tap Save  
.
10. Press  
to return to the Home screen.  
9. Tap Save  
.
Understanding Your Phone  
42  
3. Select the location where you would like to change the  
wallpaper. Tap Home screen Lock screen, or Home and  
lock screens  
Adding a New Page to the Application Menu  
You can add a new page to your application menu by  
following these steps:  
,
.
1. Press  
to activate the main Home screen.  
to display your current applications.  
4. Tap one of the following options:  
• Gallery: select a wallpaper from photographs you have taken  
with your camera.  
2. Tap  
3. Tap the Apps tab at the top of the screen if it is not  
• Live wallpapers: select an animated wallpaper. This option is  
not available for the Lock screen option.  
already selected.  
4. Press  
and tap Edit.  
• Wallpapers: select from many still-life wallpapers.  
5. Touch and hold the first application that you would like  
5. Select a wallpaper and tap Set wallpaper  
Cancel  
Adding and Deleting Home Screens  
,
Done, or  
to move to a new page.  
.
6. Drag the icon down to the Create page  
7. Tap Save  
icon.  
.
The app will appear on a new page.  
You can add and delete Home screens. You can have up to  
seven Home screens.  
Changing the Wallpaper  
You can change the Wallpaper (background) of your home  
screens by following these steps:  
1. From any Home screen, touch and hold on an empty  
area of the screen.  
To add a new Home screen:  
1. Press  
to activate the main Home screen.  
and tap Edit page  
2. Press  
.
3. Tap the Home screen that contains  
.
A new screen is added.  
The Home screen window is displayed.  
4. If desired, touch and hold the new screen and drag it to  
2. Tap Set wallpaper  
.
a different location.  
43  
 
4. Drag it to the trash can located at the bottom of the  
screen. The page will turn red.  
5. Press  
You can now add items to your new Home screen.  
To delete a Home screen:  
to return to the main Home screen.  
5. If there are items on the Home screen that you want to  
delete, the Delete home screen page prompt is  
displayed.  
1. Press  
to activate the main Home screen.  
and tap Edit page  
2. Press  
.
3. Touch and hold the Home screen you want to delete.  
6. Tap OK to delete the page and its contents, otherwise  
tap Cancel  
.
7. Press  
to return to the main Home screen.  
Understanding Your Phone  
44  
When you move a Home screen, the other Home  
screens are be re-ordered automatically.  
Moving Home Screens  
You can arrange your Home screens in any order that you  
want.  
To move a Home screen, follow these steps:  
1. Press  
to activate the main Home screen.  
and tap Edit page  
2. Press  
.
3. Touch and hold the Home screen you want to move.  
5. Press  
to return to the main Home screen.  
4. Drag it to the location that you would like to place it.  
In this example, the Dual clock app screen is moved to  
the last position.  
45  
Clearing Notifications  
Notification Bar  
To clear all notifications from the Notification panel:  
1. From the Home screen, touch and hold the Notification  
Bar until the pull-down displays, then drag down  
vertically.  
The Notification Bar includes a pull-down list to show  
information about processes that are running, recent  
notifications, and alerts. To display the Status indicator:  
On the Home screen, touch and hold the Notification  
Bar until the pull-down displays, then drag down  
vertically.  
Clear Button  
2. Tap the Clear button.  
The notifications are cleared and the panel closes.  
Understanding Your Phone  
46  
   
Accessing Additional Panel Functions  
In addition to notifications, this panel also provides quick and  
ready access to separate device functions. These can be  
quickly activated or deactivated by toggling them on or off.  
Memory Card  
Your device lets you use a microSD(SD) or microSDHC  
card to expand available memory space. This secure digital  
card enables you to exchange images, music, and data  
between SD-compatible devices. This section addresses the  
features and options of your device’s SD functionality. The  
device has a USB SD card mode.  
Mounting the SD Card  
To store additional photos, music, videos, and other  
applications, you must mount (install) the SD card prior to  
use. Mounting the SD card establishes a USB connection  
with your computer.  
1. Insert the SD card into the external, SD card slot. For  
2. Your SD card is scanned to see the available  
information on it.  
The following functions can either be activated (green) or  
deactivated (gray): Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, GPS, Sound, Screen  
rotation, Airplane mode, Power saving, Driving mode,  
AllShare Cast, and Sync.  
47  
           
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Storage  
2. Tap Format SD card  
3. At the Format SD card confirmation prompt, tap Format  
SD card  
Settings  
Unmounting the SD card  
Unmounting the SD card prevents corruption and damage to  
the SD card while removing it from the slot.  
.
.
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Storage  
2. Scroll to the bottom of the display and tap Unmount SD  
card  
3. Tap OK  
Settings  
.
.
Warning! Performing the next step erases all data stored on  
.
the SD card.  
.
4. Tap Delete all to format or press  
to cancel.  
SD card Available Memory Status  
To view the memory allocation for your external SD card:  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Storage  
Settings  
.
2. The available memory for Device and SD card displays  
under the Total space and Available space headings.  
Erasing Files from the SD card  
You can erase files from the SD card using the phone.  
1. Ensure the SD card is mounted. For more information,  
Understanding Your Phone  
48  
Section 3: Call Functions  
This section describes how to make or answer a call. It also  
includes the features and functionality associated with  
making or answering a call.  
Making an International Call  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
. The + character appears.  
, then touch and hold  
2. Use the on-screen keypad to enter the country code,  
area code, and phone number.  
Displaying Your Phone Number  
If you make a mistake, tap  
been deleted.  
until the desired numbers have  
Tap  
Settings  
About device  
Status. Your  
phone number is displayed in the My phone number  
3. Tap  
to make the call.  
field.  
Manual Pause Dialing  
To manually call a number with pause(s) without storing it in  
your Contacts list:  
Making a Call  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
and use the on-screen  
keypad to enter the number you wish to dial.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
and use the on-screen  
2. Tap  
to make the call.  
keypad to enter the phone number.  
2. Press  
to display the dialer sub-menu.  
3. Tap Add 3 sec pause to add a three second pause, and  
use the keypad to enter the additional numbers.  
Note: When you activate the Auto redial option in the Voice Call  
menu, the phone will automatically redial up to 10 times  
when the person does not answer the call or is already  
Tip: You can create pauses longer than three seconds by  
entering multiple three second pauses.  
49  
               
4. Select Add wait to add a wait. A wait will pause the  
calling sequence until you enter a number or press a  
key.  
A list of recent calls is displayed.  
3. Tap the desired Contact to enter the Details page, then  
tap  
to make a call.  
5. Tap  
to make the call.  
Making Emergency Calls  
If you do not have a SIM card installed the first time you turn  
on the phone, the Insert SIM card to make calls message  
displays and an animated tutorial shows you how to install  
the SIM card.  
Correcting an Entered Number  
Use the following steps to correct a mis-typed entry when  
dialing.  
Without a SIM card, you can only make an emergency call  
with the phone; normal cell phone service is not available.  
Making an Emergency Call without a SIM card  
1. Tap Emergency call from the on-screen display to make  
an emergency call.  
After entering a number using the keypad:  
If you make a mistake, tap  
to erase a single character.  
Press and hold to erase the entire string of numbers.  
Ending a Call  
Tap the  
2. Enter 9-1-1 and tap  
. Complete your call. During  
key.  
this type of call, you will have access to the Speaker  
mode, Keypad, and End Call features.  
Dialing a Recent Number  
All incoming, outgoing and missed calls are recorded in the  
Call log. If the number or caller is listed in your Address  
Book, the associated name also displayed.  
3. Tap  
to exit this calling mode.  
Making an Emergency Call with a SIM card  
The Emergency calling mode makes redialing an emergency  
number a 1-tap process. Before you can resume normal  
calling operations, you should first exit this mode.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
.
2. Tap the Logs tab.  
Call Functions  
50  
             
1. From the Home screen, tap  
.
Making a Call Using Speed Dial  
You can assign a short cut number to a phone number in your  
Contacts List for speed dialing.  
2. Enter the emergency number (ex: 911) and then tap  
.
3. Complete your call. During this type of call, you will  
have access to the Speaker mode, Keypad, and End  
Call features.  
1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts  
to display  
your Contacts List.  
2. Press  
to display the Contacts List sub-menu.  
After completing your emergency call,  
appears in the  
3. Tap Speed dial setting  
.
Notification area until you exit the Emergency calling mode.  
4. The Speed dial setting screen displays showing the  
numbers 1 through 100. The number 1 is reserved for  
Voicemail.  
Note: This mode can drain your battery power more rapidly  
than a normal calling mode.  
5. Tap an unused number and the Select contact screen  
displays.  
4. At the Emergency Callback screen:  
6. Select a contact to assign to the number. The selected  
contact number will display in the speed dial number  
box.  
Tap  
to callback 911 with a single tap.  
Touch and slide  
to the right to exit this mode.  
Touch and slide  
to the left return to the Home screen. This  
7. To remove a speed dial number or change the order,  
allows you to access other applications while staying in this  
mode.  
press  
8. Tap Change order or Remove  
9. To make a call using Speed Dial, tap  
to display the Speed dial setting sub-menu.  
.
Keypad  
and from the Dialer, touch and hold the speed dial  
number.  
51  
   
– or –  
Making a Call from the Address Book  
You can store phone numbers that you use regularly on the  
SIM card or in the phone’s memory. These entries are  
collectively called the Address Book.  
Tap Create new message to compose a new message.  
For further details about the Address Book feature, see  
Answering a Call  
When a call is received the phone rings and displays the  
caller’s phone number, or name if stored in the Address  
Book.  
1. At the incoming call screen:  
Touch and drag  
Touch and drag  
in any direction to answer the call.  
in any direction to reject the call and  
send it to your voicemail.  
Touch and drag the Reject call with message tab upward and  
tap a predefined text message to send to the caller.  
2. Tap  
to end the call.  
I’m driving  
I’m at the cinema  
I’m in class  
Note: You can answer a call while using the Address Book or  
other menu feature. After ending the call, the phone  
returns to the previously active function screen.  
I’m in a meeting  
Sorry, I’m busy. Call back later.  
Call Functions  
52  
       
A list of recent calls is displayed. If the number or caller  
is listed in your Address Book, the associated name is  
displayed.  
Dialing Options  
From the Home screen and Application menus, you have the  
option to access the Dialer and initiate a call by tapping  
Keypad. From the Dialer and the Contacts screen, the  
All calls made, received, and missed are listed. Types of calls  
are identified by the following icons:  
following tabs are located at the top of your screen:  
Keypad: dials the current number entered using the on-screen  
keypad.  
Incoming Calls  
Outgoing Calls  
Missed Calls  
Rejected Calls  
Auto Rejected Calls  
:
Logs: displays a list of all dialed, received, and missed calls.  
Favorites: displays your contacts that you have marked as  
Favorites.  
:
:
Contacts: takes you to your Address Book where you can select a  
contact to call.  
:
:
After you begin to enter numbers, the Add to Contacts option  
appears so you can save the Contact if needed.  
Viewing Missed Calls from the Lock Screen  
The number of calls you have missed is displayed on the  
Home screen.  
1. Touch the missed call icon with the number of missed  
calls on it and move it in any direction.  
Call Log  
The phone stores the numbers of the calls you’ve dialed,  
received, or missed in the Call log. The Call log displays the  
details of the call.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
.
2. Tap the Logs tab.  
53  
           
A list of recent calls is displayed. If the number or caller  
is listed in your Address Book, the associated name is  
displayed.  
2. Swipe the desired missed call to the right to call.  
– or –  
Swipe the desired missed call to the left to message.  
Saving a Recent Call to your Address Book  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Logs.  
A list of recent calls is displayed.  
2. Tap the call you want to save to your Address Book.  
3. The call detail page is displayed. Tap Create contact to  
add the call to your Address Book.  
Note: If there is a voicemail sent by the same number,  
associated icons are displayed and can then be  
selected.  
The Create contact screen is displayed.  
– or –  
2. The Call log is displayed. Missed calls are identified by  
If you want to replace the number for an existing  
the  
icon next to the number  
.
contact, tap Update existing  
.
Calling Back a Missed Call  
To call back a missed call number:  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Logs.  
Call Functions  
54  
   
3. At the Message screen, tap the empty text field and  
use the on-screen keypad to type in a message.  
Add as new  
contact  
4. When you are done with your message, tap  
to  
Update an existing  
send.  
contact  
Call the number  
Send a message  
Deleting a Call from the Call Log  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Logs.  
A list of recent calls is displayed.  
2. Touch and hold the call you want to delete from the Call  
log.  
4. Enter information into the various fields using the  
keypad.  
3. Tap Delete.  
4. At the Delete prompt, tap OK  
.
5. Tap Save to save when you are finished.  
The call is deleted from the Call log.  
For further details about the Address Book feature, see  
Adding a Call to the Reject List  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Logs.  
Sending a Message to a Recent Call  
A list of recent calls is displayed.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Logs.  
2. Touch and hold the call you want to add to the Reject  
A list of recent calls is displayed.  
List.  
2. Swipe the entry you want to message to the left.  
3. Tap Add to reject list.  
55  
 
4. At the Add to reject list prompt, tap OK  
.
Adjusting the Call Volume  
During a call, to adjust the earpiece volume, use the Volume  
keys on the left side of the phone.  
Future calls from this number will be rejected and sent  
to your voicemail.  
Press the Up volume key to increase the volume level  
and press the Down volume key to decrease the  
volume level.  
Call Duration  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
2. Press Call duration  
Logs.  
.
From the Home screen, you can also adjust the ringer volume  
using these same keys.  
3. The following times are displayed for Voice and Data:  
• Last call: shows the length of time for the last call.  
• Dialed calls: shows the total length of time for all calls made.  
• Received calls: shows the total length of time for all calls  
received.  
In-Call Options  
During an active call there are several functions available by  
tapping a corresponding on-screen button.  
Hold: place the current active call on hold.  
• All calls: shows the total length of time for all calls made and  
received.  
Add call: displays the dialer so you can call another person.  
Keypad: displays the on-screen keypad, where you can  
enter number using DTMF (Dual Tone Multi-Frequency).  
End call: terminates the call.  
4. You may reset these times to zero by pressing  
then tapping Reset  
.
Options During a Call  
Your phone provides a number of control functions that you  
can use during a call.  
Speaker: routes the phone’s audio through either the speaker or  
through the earpiece.  
Tap Speaker to route the audio through the speaker. (You can  
adjust the speaker volume using the volume keys.) A green line  
will appear under the Speaker button.  
Call Functions  
56  
           
Tap Speaker again to use the phone’s earpiece (see “Using  
green line will disappear when Speaker is not activated.  
Placing a Call on Hold  
You can place the current call on hold at any point during a  
conversation. You can also make another call while you have  
a call in progress if your network supports this service.  
Hold  
Mute/Unmute turn the onboard microphone either on or off.  
Tap Mute during a call to mute the microphone. A green line  
will appear under the Mute button.  
Tap Mute again to unmute the microphone. The green line will  
disappear when Mute is not activated.  
1. While on a call, tap Hold  
. This action places  
the current caller on hold.  
2. You can later reactivate this call by tapping Unhold  
Unhold  
.
Headset connects to a Bluetooth headset.  
To make a new call while you have a call in progress  
Tap Headset during a call to activate a Bluetooth headset. A  
green line will appear under the Headset button.  
Hold  
1. Tap Hold  
.
2. Tap Add call  
to display the dialer.  
Tap Headset again to de-activate the Bluetooth headset. The  
green line will disappear when the Headset is not activated.  
3. Enter the new number and tap  
.
Press  
for more options:  
Once connected, the active call will appear in a large  
box at the top of your screen and the call on hold will  
appear in a smaller box in the middle of your screen.  
Contacts: allows you to go to your Contact list.  
Message: allows you to write a message during a call.  
S Note: allows you to write a note using the S Note app.  
Noise reduction on/off: allows you to turn on the Noise  
reduction feature when you are in a noisy area. Turn it Off when  
not needed to conserve battery power.  
My call sound: assigns a sound equalizer preset for use during  
an active call. Sometimes you might need the sound to be  
softer, clearer, or optimized for one ear or the other.  
57  
     
Tap Ending call with "Name/Number" to end the first  
call.  
Switching Between Calls  
When you have an active call and a call on hold, you may  
switch between the two calls, changing the one on hold to  
active and placing the other on hold.  
3. To switch between the two calls, tap Swap.  
• Swap: Places the current call on hold and then activates the  
previous call. The active call will appear in a green box. Tap  
Swap again to switch back.  
1. Tap Swap.  
The current call (caller #2) is placed on hold and the  
previous call on hold (caller #1) is then reactivated so  
that you can continue conversing with that person. The  
active call will appear in a green box.  
To end a call on hold  
1. Tap  
to disconnect the active call.  
2. The call on hold will now become the active call. Tap  
2. Tap  
to end the currently active call.  
to end the call.  
To end a specific call  
1. Tap Swap until the call you want to end appears in a  
3-Way Calling (Multi-Party Calling)  
The 3-Way or Multi-Party feature allows you to answer a  
series of incoming calls and place them on hold. If this  
service is supported by the network, all calls can be joined  
together. You are notified of an incoming call by a call waiting  
tone.  
green box.  
2. Tap  
to end the specific call.  
3. Tap  
to end the remaining call.  
To answer a call while you have a call in progress  
1. Tap  
and slide to the right to answer another call.  
Note: The Merge option combines all of the calls you have  
established with your phone (both active and on hold).  
Swap places the current call on hold and then activates  
the previous call.  
2. Tap Putting "Name/Number" on hold to put the first call  
on hold.  
– or –  
Call Functions  
58  
   
This feature joins all of the calls you have established with  
your phone (both active and on hold) into a multi-party call.  
1. Tap  
and slide to the right to answer the call.  
2. Tap  
and slide to the right to answer the next call.  
3. Tap Putting "Number" on hold to put the first call on  
hold.  
4. Join the first two callers into a single multi-party call by  
tapping Merge  
.
Merge  
5. To temporarily leave the conference call, tap Hold  
Hold  
.
Unhold  
To rejoin the conference call tap Unhold  
.
2. Use the Volume keys (located on the left side of your  
6. Tap  
to end the call.  
phone) to adjust the volume.  
Using the Speakerphone During an Active Call  
While in an active call, it is possible to enable the  
3. To deactivate the speakerphone, tap Speaker  
.
Speaker  
speakerphone feature.  
Important! For more information, see “Responsible Listening”  
1. Tap Speaker  
.
Speaker  
The Speaker button now appears as  
and the  
Speaker  
speakerphone is activated.  
59  
     
Switching off the Microphone (Mute)  
You can temporarily switch your phone’s microphone off, so  
Searching for a Number in Address Book  
1. During the active call, press  
then tap Contacts.  
that the other person cannot hear you.  
2. Tap the Address Book entry.  
For further details about the Address Book feature, see  
Example: You wish to say something to person in the room,  
but do not want the person on the phone to hear  
you.  
Call Waiting  
The Call Waiting feature allows you to answer an incoming  
call while you have a call in progress, if this service is  
supported by the network, and you must first activate the  
Call Waiting feature:  
To mute your phone during a call  
1. Tap Mute  
Mute  
.
The Mute button now appears as  
and Mute is  
Mute  
From the Home screen, tap  
Call settings  
activated.  
Additional settings Call waiting.  
2. Tap Mute  
to deactivate the Mute function and  
Mute  
You are notified of an incoming call by a call waiting  
tone.  
reactivate the microphone.  
Bluetooth headset  
1. Tap Headset  
.
Headset  
Call Settings  
To access the Call settings menu:  
2. The phone will scan for your Bluetooth headset. When  
found, connect to the headset.  
From the Home screen, tap  
settings  
Call  
The Headset button now appears as  
Bluetooth headset is activated.  
and the  
Headset  
.
3. Tap Headset  
to deactivate the Bluetooth headset  
Headset  
and reactivate the phone speaker.  
Call Functions  
60  
       
3. Tap Save to save the reject message.  
Call rejection  
1. From the Call settings screen, tap Call rejection  
.
Ringtones and keypad tones  
2. Tap the OFF / ON icon to turn Auto reject mode on  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Call settings  
.
ON  
Ringtones and keypad tones  
2. Tap Device ringtone, select a ringtone, and tap OK  
3. Tap Device vibration, select a vibration type, and tap  
OK  
.
3. Tap Auto reject mode and tap one of the following  
options:  
.
• All numbers: to reject all calls.  
.
• Auto reject numbers: to reject all calls in your Reject list.  
4. Tap Incoming call vibration to create a checkmark if  
you want your phone to vibrate when a call is  
incoming.  
4. Tap Auto reject list  
.
5. Tap to manually add numbers to the Reject list.  
6. Tap Unknown, to create a checkmark and automatically  
5. Tap Keytones to create a checkmark if you want tones  
to play when the keypad is pressed.  
reject all calls that are not in your Contacts list.  
Set reject messages  
Call alert  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Call alert  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Call settings  
Call settings  
Set reject messages  
.
.
2. Tap  
to manually add a reject message.  
2. Tap Call vibrations to enable your phone to vibrate  
when the called party answers the phone.  
– or –  
3. Tap Call status tones to set the sound settings during a  
Tap one of the pre-written messages to be displayed  
when you want the call to be rejected. You can edit the  
message if desired.  
call then tap OK  
.
4. Tap Alerts on call to turn off alarm and message  
notifications during a call.  
61  
• Automatic answering timer: configures the time delay before  
the device automatically accepts the incoming call.  
• Outgoing call conditions: allows you to make calls even when  
the device is locked.  
Call answering/ending  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Call settings  
Call answering/ending  
.
2. The following options are available:  
• Answering key: Tap this option to be able to accept incoming  
calls by pressing the Home key.  
My call sound  
This option allows you to personalize the sounds you hear  
• The power key ends calls: This option will allow you to end a  
call by pressing the power key without turning off the screen.  
during a call with and without earphones.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
My call sound  
2. Tap My call sound settings  
Call settings  
.
Auto screen off during calls  
This option turns on the proximity sensor during calls so that  
.
your phone will know to turn the screen off to save power.  
3. Tap Personalize call sound and follow the detailed  
on-screen instructions.  
From the Home screen, tap  
settings Auto screen off during calls to create a  
checkmark and enable the feature.  
Call  
Use extra vol. for calls  
This option allows you to see an extra volume button on the  
screen during calls.  
Accessory settings for call  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Call settings  
From the Home screen, tap  
settings Use extra vol. for calls to create a  
checkmark and enable the feature.  
Call  
Accessory settings for call  
.
2. The following options are available:  
• Automatic answering: configures the device to automatically  
answer and incoming call when a headset is detected.  
Call Functions  
62  
   
• Forward when unreachable: allows you to forward voice calls  
to a designated number instead of your voicemail number  
when you are not in an area covered by your service provider or  
when your phone is switched off.  
Increase volume in pocket  
This option increases the ringtone volume when the device is  
in a pocket or a bag. It uses the proximity sensor to detect its  
location.  
From the Home screen, tap  
settings Increase volume in pocket to create a  
checkmark and enable the feature.  
Call  
Additional settings  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Additional settings  
2. Tap one of the following options:  
Call settings  
.
Call forwarding  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
• Caller ID: allows you to choose how your Caller ID will be  
displayed. Select Network default, Hide number, or Show  
number.  
Call settings  
Call forwarding  
Voice call.  
2. Tap one of the following options:  
• Call waiting: the network service informs you when someone  
is trying to reach you during another call. Tap to activate.  
• Auto redial: automatically redials the last number if the call  
was either cut off or was unable to connect. Tap to activate.  
• Noise reduction: allows you to suppress background noise  
from your side during calls.  
• Always forward: allows you to forward all voice calls.  
• Forward when busy allows you to forward voice calls to a  
designated number instead of your voice mail number if you  
are on another phone call.  
• Forward when unanswered: allows you to forward voice calls  
to a designated number instead of your voicemail number  
when there is no answer on your phone. You can also select  
the amount of time that the phone delays before forwarding.  
• Fixed Dialing Numbers: allows you to restrict outgoing calls to  
a limited set of phone numbers.  
63  
 
• Auto area code: allows you to automatically prepend a specific  
area code to all outbound calls. Slide the slider to the on  
position.  
Changing the PIN2 Code  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Call settings  
Additional settings  
Fixed dialing numbers.  
2. Tap Change PIN2  
.
Using Fixed Dialing Numbers  
3. At the prompt, enter your old PIN2 code.  
4. At the prompt, enter a new PIN2 code.  
5. Confirm your PIN2 code.  
Enabling FDN  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Additional settings Fixed dialing numbers  
2. Tap Enable FDN  
Call settings  
.
.
Managing the FDN List  
3. At the prompt, enter your PIN2 code and tap OK  
.
When this feature is enabled, you can make calls only to  
phone numbers stored in the FDN list on the SIM card.  
FDN is enabled.  
4. To enable FDN after it has been disabled, tap Disable  
FDN, enter your PIN2 code and tap OK  
Note: Before you can manage an FDN list a list must be  
.
created.  
Important! Not all SIM cards use a PIN2 code. If your SIM card  
does not, this menu does not display.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Additional settings Fixed dialing numbers  
2. Tap FDN list  
3. A list of all existing FDN numbers will be displayed.  
Call settings  
.
The PIN2 code is provided by your carrier. Entering  
an incorrect PIN2 code could cause the phone to  
lock. Contact customer service for assistance.  
.
Call Functions  
64  
Voicemail service  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Vibrate  
Call settings  
This option allows you select vibration settings.  
Voicemail Service.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Vibrate  
Call settings  
Voicemail service provided by your carrier is the  
default.  
.
2. Tap Always Only in Silent mode, or Never.  
,
2. Tap My carrier to remove the carrier Voicemail service.  
TTY Mode  
A TTY (also known as a TDD or Text Telephone) is a  
telecommunications device that allows people who are deaf,  
hard of hearing, or who have speech or language disabilities,  
to communicate by telephone.  
Voicemail settings  
You can view or modify your voicemail number from this  
menu.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Voicemail settings  
Call settings  
Your phone is compatible with select TTY devices. Please  
check with the manufacturer of your TTY device to ensure  
that it is compatible with digital cell phones.  
.
2. Tap the Voice mail number field, backspace to erase the  
digits, and enter a new voicemail number using the  
Your phone and TTY device will connect via a special cable  
that plugs into your phone’s headset jack. If this cable was  
not provided with your TTY device, contact your TTY device  
manufacturer to purchase the connector cable.  
keypad, then tap OK  
3. Tap OK  
Ringtone  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Ringtone  
2. Tap a ringtone to hear it played.  
.
.
Call settings  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
TTY mode  
2. Tap TTY Full TTY HCO, or TTY VCO. A green checkmark  
will appear. Tap TTY Off to turn it off.  
Call settings  
.
.
,
3. Select a ringtone and tap OK  
.
65  
 
Hearing aids  
This option allows you to turn on Hearing aid compatibility on  
your device.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
settings  
Call  
.
2. Tap Hearing aids to create a checkmark and make your  
device compatible with a Hearing aid.  
Call Functions  
66  
Section 4: Entering Text  
This section describes how to select the desired text input  
method when entering characters into your phone. This  
section also describes the predictive text entry system that  
reduces the amount of key strokes associated with entering  
text.  
Entering Text Using the Samsung  
Keyboard  
From a screen where you can enter text, rotate your phone  
counterclockwise to a Landscape orientation. The on-screen  
QWERTY keypad will display.  
Your phone comes equipped with an orientation detector that  
can tell if the phone is being held in an upright (Portrait) or  
sideways (Landscape) orientation. This is useful when  
entering text.  
Text Input Methods  
There are three text input methods available:  
Shift  
Key  
Delete  
Key  
Samsung keyboard (default): Samsung’s on-screen  
QWERTY keypad that can be used in both portrait and  
landscape orientation.  
New  
Paragraph  
Google Voice typing: allows you to enter text by speaking.  
Swype: a new way to enter text on touch screens. Instead  
of tapping each key, use your finger to trace over each  
letter of a word.  
Space Bar  
Handwriting  
Text Input Mode  
To change the input method, see “Keyboards and Input  
67  
             
ChangingtheTextInputMode-Keypad  
There are two main keypad layout keys that will change the  
on-screen keys within the QWERTY keypad.  
The available Text Input modes are: Sym and Abc  
.
Symbol/Numeric Mode: activates the number,  
symbol, and emoticon keys.  
Sym  
ABC Mode: activates the default alphabet keys.  
Can also be set to Abc or abc by using the shift  
3. Tap the desired alphabetic characters.  
ABC  
4. The screen initially opens in ABC mode. After typing the  
(
) key.  
first letter, the shift key (  
and following letters will be lowercase.  
5. Tap to input another upper-case letter or tap  
twice to switch to ABC mode. The shift key will  
) will change to  
Note: When in Abc mode, the Sym button will appear. When in  
Sym mode, the Abc ABC abc button will appear.  
/
/
change to  
in ABC mode. All following letters  
will be uppercase until you tap the shift key again.  
Using ABC Mode  
1. If desired, rotate your phone counterclockwise to a  
Landscape orientation.  
2. When you tap the Enter message field, the following  
screen displays:  
Entering Text  
68  
         
Using Symbol/Numeric Mode  
Predictive Text  
Use Symbol/Numeric Mode to add numbers, symbols, or  
By using the Predictive Text option, you can have next-letter  
prediction and regional error correction, which compensates  
for pressing the wrong keys on the QWERTY keyboard.  
Predictive text is turned on by default.  
emoticons.  
1. Rotate your phone counterclockwise to a Landscape  
orientation.  
1. To turn Predictive Text on or off, tap  
Settings  
Sym  
2. Tap  
at the bottom of the screen. The following  
Language and input.  
screen displays:  
2. Tap the  
icon next to Samsung keyboard  
.
3. Tap the ON/OFF slider, located to the right of the  
Predictive text field, to  
.
ON  
4. In the text portion of the message screen, begin typing  
a word. A list of word options is displayed. Tap one of  
the words to replace the word that has already been  
typed or scroll the line of words to the left for more  
word choices.  
3. Tap the desired number, symbol, or emoticon  
characters.  
1/2  
4. Tap the  
button to access additional symbols.  
to return to Abc mode.  
ABC  
5. Tap  
69  
       
5. Continue typing your message. Tap  
to send the  
message or press for more options. For more  
Note: You can also use Predictive Text mode in the portrait  
orientation.  
Entering Text Using Handwriting  
Samsung Keyboard Settings  
For information on how you can configure your Samsung  
You can enter text simply by using your finger to handwrite  
letters on your screen.  
1. From the keypad, tap  
.
2. Use your finger tip to write out each character. You can  
print or use cursive.  
UsingtheGoogleVoiceTypingFeature  
You can use your voice to enter text using the Google Voice  
typing feature.  
3. You can write out your entire message using the  
Handwriting feature or tap  
Samsung keyboard mode.  
to switch back to  
1. From the keypad, touch the top of the screen and drag  
it down to display your notification panel.  
2. Tap Choose input method  
.
3. Tap Google voice typing  
.
Entering Text  
70  
           
Entering Text Using Swype  
Swype™ is a text input method that allows you to enter a  
word by sliding your finger or stylus from letter to letter,  
lifting your finger between words. Swype uses error  
correcting algorithms and a language model to predict the  
next word. Swype also includes a tapping predictive text  
system.  
The following example shows how to enter the word “This”.  
Put your finger down on the “T”, and without lifting, glide it  
to the “h”, then to the “i” then over to the “s”.  
4. At the Speak now prompt, speak clearly and distinctly  
into the microphone.  
5. If the red microphone turns gray, then the feature has  
timed out and you should tap the microphone icon to  
start again.  
The text is displayed in the message as you are  
speaking.  
Note: The feature works best when you break your message  
down into smaller segments.  
Enabling and Configuring Swype  
The Samsung keyboard is the default text input method, so  
to use Swype, you must first change the default keyboard  
setting.  
71  
   
To enable Swype:  
1. From a screen where you can enter text, touch and  
Double-tap on the word you want to change to correct a  
misspelled word, then tap the delete key to erase one character.  
Touch and hold the delete key to erase an entire word.  
drag  
down from the Notifications area then tap  
Select input method  
.
2. Tap the Swype radio button. It will turn green.  
The Swype keyboard is displayed.  
Swype Settings  
For information on how you can configure your Swype  
Swype Text Entry Tips  
You can access the SwypeTips application and watch a video  
or tutorial on using Swype. You can also use the following  
Swype text entry tips.  
Create a squiggle (like an S shape) to create a double letter (such  
as pp in apple).  
Touch and hold a key to view the punctuation menu then make a  
selection.  
Move your finger or stylus over the apostrophe to enter  
contractions.  
Entering Text  
72  
 
Section 5: Contacts and Your Address Book  
This section allows you to manage your daily contacts by  
storing their name and number in your Address Book.  
Address Book entries can be sorted by name, entry, or group.  
You can also manage your Address Book on the web  
at http://www.att.com/addressbook  
.
Synchronizing your AT&T Address Book  
If you ever upgrade, damage, or lose your phone, you can  
easily restore your contacts onto your new phone by  
following these steps:  
AT&T Address Book Activation  
When you access the AT&T Address Book, the network  
backup service, contacts are automatically synchronized  
between your phone and online address book. The changes  
you make are automatically saved and if you ever upgrade,  
damage, or lose your phone, you can easily restore your  
contacts onto your new phone.  
1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts  
2. Press Settings AT&T Address Book  
3. At the AT&T Address Book screen, tap Yes to  
.
.
synchronize your phone with your online Address Book.  
4. If there are existing contacts on your phone, you will be  
prompted if you would like to remove them first. Tap  
To activate the AT&T Address Book:  
1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts  
.
Your Address Book is displayed.  
Yes or No  
.
2. If you have not synchronized your phone with your  
online AT&T Address Book recently, the AT&T Address  
Book screen is displayed. Tap Yes if you want to  
synchronize your Address Book.  
Note: You must first copy any contacts that exist on your SIM  
3. Follow the on-screen instructions.  
Your phone is synchronized.  
Your AT&T Address Book is Ready to Use. You can now make  
a call or send a message through your Address Book.  
73  
       
5. At the Your AT&T Address Book is Ready for Use prompt,  
tap OK  
• Remove: although not an option with a new entry, deletes any  
previously assigned image on an existing contact.  
4. Tap the Name field and use the on-screen keypad to  
.
Your Contact list is displayed.  
Adding a New Contact  
Use the following procedure to add a new contact to your  
Address Book.  
– or –  
Tap  
next to the Name field to display additional  
Saving a Number from the Home screen  
name fields.  
1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts  
.
5. Tap the Phone number field.  
The numerical keypad is displayed.  
Mobile  
2. At the Save contact prompt, tap OK or Add new account  
if want want to add a new account to save the contact  
to.  
The Mobile button  
initially displays next to the  
3. Tap the image icon and assign a picture to the new  
entry by choosing one of three options:  
Phone number field. If you want to add a phone number  
that is not a mobile number, tap the Mobile button and  
select from Mobile, Home, Work, Work fax, Home Fax,  
Pager, Other, Custom (add your own label), or Callback.  
• Image: retrieve a previously stored image from your Gallery or  
from your My files folder and assign it to this entry. Tap an  
image to assign the image to the contact, then tap Done  
Take picture: use the camera to take a new picture and assign  
it to this entry, then tap Done  
.
6. Enter the phone number.  
Tap  
to add another Phone number field or tap  
.
to delete a field.  
• S Note: retrieve a previously stored image from your S Note  
app.  
7. Tap the Email address field.  
The keypad is displayed.  
Contacts and Your Address Book  
74  
     
Home  
The Home button  
initially displays next to the  
• Events: tap  
to add a Birthday, Anniversary, Other, or  
Email address field. If you want to add an Email address  
that is not a Home email address, tap the Home button  
and select from Home, Work, Other, or Custom (add  
your own label).  
Custom.  
• Groups: assign the contact to Not assigned, ICE - emergency  
contacts, Co-workers, Family, or Friends.  
• Ringtone: adds a field used to assign a message tone that will  
sound when messages are received from this contact. Choose  
between Default, Ringtones, or Go to My files.  
• Message alert: allows you to set a message alert tone for the  
contact.  
8. Enter the Email address.  
Tap  
to add another Email address field or tap  
to delete a field.  
9. Tap the Address field.  
• Vibration pattern: allows you to set the specific type of  
vibration.  
The keypad is displayed.  
Home  
The Home button  
initially displays next to the  
• Add another field tap this button to add another field such as  
Phonetic name, Organization, IM, Notes, Nickname, Website,  
Internet call, or Relationship.  
:
Address field. If you want to add an address that is not  
a Home address, tap the Home button and select from  
Home, Work, Other, or Custom (add your own label).  
12. Tap Save to save the new contact.  
10. Enter the address.  
Adding Pauses to Contact Numbers  
Tap  
to add another address field or tap  
to  
When you call automated systems, you are often required to  
enter a password or account number. Instead of manually  
entering the numbers each time, you can store the numbers  
in your Contacts along with special characters called pauses  
delete a field.  
11. Tap any of the following fields that you want to add to  
your new contact:  
75  
 
and waits. A pause will stop the calling sequence for two  
seconds and a wait will pause the calling sequence until you  
enter a number or press a key.  
Editing an Existing Contact  
When editing an existing contact, you can tap a field and  
change or delete the information, or you can add additional  
fields to the contact’s list of information.  
To add a pause or a wait to an existing Contact:  
1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts  
, and then tap  
1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts  
2. Press and hold the Contact that you want to edit.  
3. Tap Edit  
.
the name or number to open the Contact.  
2. Tap  
to edit.  
.
3. Tap the phone number field.  
4. Tap any of the fields to add, change, or delete  
information.  
4. Tap the screen at the position where the pause or wait  
needs to be added.  
5. Tap Save to save the edited information.  
Sym  
5. Tap  
.
Using Contacts  
Dialing or Messaging from Address Book  
Once you have stored phone numbers in the Address Book,  
you can dial them easily and quickly by either using their SIM  
card location number or by using the Search field to locate  
the entry.  
6. Tap Pause to add a two-second pause or tap Wait to  
add a wait, and use the keypad to enter the additional  
numbers. A pause will be displayed as a comma (,) and  
a wait will be displayed as a semi-colon (;).  
7. Tap Save to save your changes, or tap Cancel to  
discard.  
From the Address book, you can also send messages.  
Contacts and Your Address Book  
76  
       
Finding an Address Book Entry  
3. Tap the contact you wish to call or message.  
4. Tap the phone icon to make a phone call or tap the  
message icon to send a message.  
You can store phone numbers and their corresponding  
names onto your SIM card and phone’s onboard memory.  
The two locations are physically separate but are used as a  
single entity, called the Address Book.  
Depending on your particular SIM card, the maximum  
number of phone numbers the SIM card can store and how  
they are stored may differ.  
1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts  
.
2. Within the Contacts list (sorted alphabetically), tap a  
letter on the right side of the display to quickly jump to  
the contacts beginning with that letter.  
Tip: From the Contact list, sweep right over a listing to make a  
call. Sweep left over a listing to send a message.  
77  
 
For more information about synchronizing accounts, see  
Joining Contacts  
Joining Contact Information  
1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts  
.
Many people now maintain multiple email accounts, social  
networking logins, and other similar account information. For  
example, a Facebook account login name might differ from a  
corporate email account login because they are maintained  
separately and for different groups of people.  
2. Tap a contact name (the name you want to join to  
another entry). Note: typically this is the same contact  
with a different name or account information.  
3. Press  
Join contact.  
This device can synchronize with multiple accounts such as  
Facebook, Twitter, MySpace, Corporate email, and Google.  
When you synchronize your phone with these accounts, each  
account creates a separate contact entry in the Contacts list.  
The contact list is displayed.  
Note: Only contacts stored on your phone can be joined.  
4. Tap the second contact entry (the entry in which to  
join). The second contact is now joined with the first  
and the account information is merged into one screen.  
If one of your contacts (Amy Smith, for example) has a  
regular email account that you maintain in Gmail, but also  
has a Facebook account under her maiden and married  
name, as well as a Yahoo! chat account, when you merge  
these accounts into your Contacts list you can join all of her  
entries and view the information in one record.  
Note: The information is still maintained in both entries, but  
displays in one record for easier viewing when you join  
the contacts.  
The next time you synchronize your phone with your  
accounts, any updates that contacts make to email account  
names, email addresses, etc. automatically update in your  
contacts list.  
5. Tap the Connection bar to view the contact information  
you joined. The contacts and information displays with  
an icon next to the contact name to indicate what type  
of account information is contained in the entry.  
Contacts and Your Address Book  
78  
   
3. Press  
Mark as default. The Mark as default  
Unjoining a Contact  
screen displays radio buttons next to the contact  
names or phone numbers of all the linked contacts.  
The radio button next to the default contact will be  
green.  
1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts  
.
2. Tap a contact name (the account name from which you  
want to unlink an entry). Note: typically this is the same  
contact with a different name or account information.  
3. Tap the Connection bar.  
4. To change the default contact, tap the radio button next  
to another entry that you want to be the default. The  
4. Tap the minus sign  
next to entry in which you  
radio button will turn green, then tap Done  
.
want to unjoin. The contact is now separated and no  
longer displays in the merged record screen.  
Synchronizing Accounts  
From the Accounts menu you decide if you want applications  
to synchronize, send, and receive data at any given time, or if  
you want the applications to synchronize automatically. After  
determining how you want the accounts to synchronize,  
indicate which account to synchronize with your Contacts  
list.  
Marking a Contact as Default  
When you use messaging type applications, the application  
needs to know which information is primary (default) in a  
contact entry list. For example, you may have three different  
contact records for John Smith, so the application will be  
looking for the “default” number or entry.  
1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts  
2. Press then tap Accounts  
.
1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts  
.
.
2. Tap a Contact name.  
3. Tap the Auto sync app data checkbox to create a  
checkmark and activate the feature.  
79  
   
4. Tap OK to synchronize all accounts.  
• Accounts: allows you to add and manage your Samsung,  
ChatON, Google, LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol),  
and Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync accounts. Tap Add account  
and then follow the on-screen instructions.  
The accounts are synchronized.  
Address Book Options  
You can access Address Book options while at the main  
Address Book page or while in the details page for a specific  
entry.  
• Speed dial setting: allows you to set up speed-dialing. For  
Options in Address Book  
1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts  
• Send email: allows you to send an email using your Google  
account.  
then press  
.
• Send message: allows you to send a text or picture message.  
• Contacts to display: You can choose to display all of your  
contacts or only display contacts on your Phone, SIM, or  
contacts stored to other accounts. You can also tap Customized  
list to change other options on how your contacts are displayed.  
• Settings: allows you to choose set the following options:  
2. The following options are displayed:  
• Delete: allows you to delete 1 or more of your contacts.  
• SIM Management: allows you to copy contacts from your  
phone to your SIM card or from your SIM card to your phone.  
You can also delete contacts from your SIM.  
• Import/Export: allows you to move contacts to or from your  
memory card or USB storage. You can also send a namecard  
via Bluetooth, ChatON, Email, Gmail, Messaging, or Wi-Fi  
Direct.  
Only contacts with phones: allows you to only display  
contacts that have phone numbers.  
List by: allows you to sort by First name or Last name.  
Display contacts by: allows you to sort by First name or Last  
name first.  
Contacts and Your Address Book  
80  
   
Service numbers: allows you to display or edit your service  
numbers.  
• Mark as default: when you have multiple contacts linked  
together, you can mark one of them as default (only displays  
when contact is saved to the phone). For more information,  
• Assign speed dial: allows you to assign this contact to your  
Contact sharing settings: allows you to send all or individual  
contacts via Bluetooth in the form of namecards.  
AT&T Address Book: allows you to access the AT&T Address  
Book so you can sync your contacts.  
Options at Selected Contact Screen  
1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts  
• Share namecard via: allows you to send the contact’s  
information via Bluetooth, ChatON, Email, Gmail, Messaging, or  
Wi-Fi Direct.  
.
2. Tap a contact and at the contact’s display screen, press  
.
• Add to/Remove from reject list: allows you to add or remove  
the contact from your reject list. If they call while being on the  
reject list, the call will be sent directly to voice mail.  
• Print contact info: allows you to print the contact’s namecard  
to a Samsung printer using Wi-Fi.  
3. The following options are displayed:  
• History: allows you to view the phone and message history for  
the contact.  
• Edit: allows you to edit the contact’s information.  
• Delete: allows you to delete the contact from your Address  
Book.  
• Add shortcut to Home: allows you to place a shortcut for this  
contact on your Home screen.  
• Join contact: allows you to join contacts with other contacts  
(only displays when contact is saved to SIM).  
• Separate contact: allows you to separate contacts that have  
been joined.  
81  
Creating a New Group  
Groups  
1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts  
Groups  
Adding a Contact to a Group  
Create.  
Groups  
1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts  
.
2. Tap the Group name field and use the on-screen  
keypad to enter a new group name. For more  
3. Tap Group ringtone to choose an audio file for  
assignment to this new group. Choose from Default  
2. Press and hold a contact that you would like to add to a  
group.  
3. Tap Add to group  
4. Tap a group entry.  
5. Tap Done  
.
,
.
Ringtones, or Go to My files  
.
The contact is added to the group.  
4. Tap Vibration pattern to choose an audio file for  
assignment to this new group.  
Removing a Contact From a Group  
1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts  
5. Tap Add member to add contacts to the new group.  
6. Tap each contact you want to add to create a  
Groups  
2. Tap a group entry.  
3. Press Remove member  
.
Groups  
checkmark. You can also tap Select all  
.
.
7. Tap Done  
.
4. Tap all of the contacts you want to remove from this  
group. A green checkmark will appear next to their  
name.  
8. Tap Save to save the new Group category.  
Editing a Caller Group  
To edit a Group entry, there must be at least one member as  
part of the selected group.  
1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts  
5. Tap Done  
.
The contacts are now removed from the group.  
Groups  
.
Groups  
Contacts and Your Address Book  
82  
           
2. Tap a group entry.  
3. Press Edit  
Removing Favorites from your Address Book  
1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts  
.
.
4. Make modifications to the Group name  
,
Group ringtone  
,
2. Within the Contacts list, touch and hold a contact that  
you want to remove from your favorites list. Contacts in  
your Favorites list will have a gold star.  
or Vibration pattern fields.  
5. Tap Add member to add more contacts to this group.  
6. Tap Done  
3. Tap Remove from favorites on the displayed list.  
4. The gold star will no longer appear next to the contact  
in the Address Book.  
.
7. Tap Save to save the edited Group category.  
Address Book Favorites  
Once you have stored phone numbers in the Address Book,  
you can add them to your Favorites list.  
Managing Address Book Contacts  
You can copy, delete, and view the memory status for the  
Phone and SIM contacts on your phone.  
To view your Favorites list:  
Copying Contacts to the SIM Card  
From the Home screen, tap Contacts  
Favorites  
.
Favorites  
Note: When storing an Address Book entry into the SIM card,  
only the name, phone number, and email address are  
available as fields. Also, if you move the SIM card to  
another phone that does not support additional fields on  
the SIM card, this additional information may not be  
available.  
Adding Favorites to your Address Book  
1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts  
.
2. Within the Contacts list, touch and hold a contact that  
you want to add to your favorites list.  
3. Tap Add to Favorites on the displayed list.  
4. A gold star will appear next to the contact in the  
Address Book.  
1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts  
SIM Management  
.
83  
         
2. Tap Copy Contacts to SIM  
.
4. Tap the contacts to place a checkmark adjacent to  
those entries you wish to have copied to your phone.  
The phone then displays a list of your current phone  
contacts.  
Repeat this step for all individual entries you wish copied to  
your phone or tap Select all to place a checkmark alongside all  
entries.  
3. Tap the contacts to place a checkmark adjacent to  
those entries you wish to have copied to the SIM card.  
5. Tap Done to copy.  
Repeat this step for all individual entries you wish copied to the  
SIM or tap Select all to place a checkmark alongside all  
entries.  
The selected numbers are copied.  
Deleting Contacts from the SIM card  
1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts  
4. Tap Done to copy.  
5. At the Copy to SIM display, tap OK  
.
SIM Management  
.
The selected numbers are copied to the SIM card.  
2. Tap Delete Contacts from SIM  
.
The phone then displays a list of your current SIM  
contacts.  
Copying Contacts to the Phone  
1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts  
SIM Management  
.
3. Tap the contacts to place a checkmark adjacent to  
those entries you wish to have deleted from the SIM  
card.  
2. Tap Copy Contacts from SIM  
.
3. At the Create contact under account prompt, tap on  
Phone or an account name that you would like to copy  
the contact to.  
Repeat this step for all individual entries you wish copied to the  
SIM or tap Select all to place a checkmark alongside all  
entries.  
The phone then displays a list of your current contacts  
stored on your SIM card.  
4. Tap Delete  
.
5. At the Delete Contacts from SIM prompt, tap OK  
.
Contacts and Your Address Book  
84  
     
The selected numbers are deleted from the SIM card.  
Note: This menu is available only when your SIM card  
Deleting Address Book Entries from the Phone  
supports Service Dialing Numbers.  
You can delete Phone or SIM entries from your phone’s  
memory.  
1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts  
.
2. Within the Contacts list, touch and hold a contact that  
you want to delete.  
3. Tap Delete on the displayed list.  
4. At the Delete prompt, tap OK to delete the contact or  
Cancel to exit.  
Using the Service Dialing Numbers  
You can view the list of Service Dialing Numbers (SDN)  
assigned by your service provider. These numbers may  
include emergency numbers, customer service numbers, and  
directory inquiries.  
1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts  
Settings  
2. Tap Service numbers  
.
.
3. Scroll through the available numbers (if available).  
4. Tap a number and the call is made.  
85  
   
Section 6: Multimedia  
This section explains how to use the multimedia features of  
your phone, including AT&T Locker, Media Hub, Music Hub,  
Music Player, Google Play Music, Video Player, Play Movies &  
TV, Gallery, Camera, and Camcorder.  
6. At the AT&T Locker homescreen, tap Sign Me Up! to  
create an account or tap Sign In if you already have an  
account.  
7. Follow the on-screen instructions to use AT&T Locker.  
AT&T Locker  
AT&T Locker allows you to store, share, and sync all of your  
photos, videos, and documents in one safe, convenient  
place; the AT&T cloud.  
Media Hub  
Samsung Media Hub is your one stop for the hottest movie  
and TV content. With hundreds of titles available at your  
fingertips, entertaining yourself or your kids on the go has  
never been easier. You can rent or purchase your favorite  
content and watch from the convenience of anywhere.  
Featuring the stunning viewing quality Samsung is known  
for, Samsung Media Hub is your gateway to mobile video like  
you've never experienced it before.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
AT&T Locker  
.
2. Sign on to your Google account if you are not already  
The Play Store is displayed.  
3. The first time you sign in, the Play Store Terms of  
Service will be displayed. Tap Accept to continue or  
Decline to exit.  
Note: Media Hub usage is based on service availability.  
Using Media Hub  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
4. Tap Update  
5. Tap Accept & download  
AT&T Locker will be downloaded to your device.  
.
Settings  
Security  
Unknown sources to create a checkmark and allow  
.
the Samsung app to run.  
Multimedia  
86  
             
2. At the warning prompt, tap OK  
.
9. At the Details screen, follow the on-screen instructions  
to create a Samsung account and make a purchase.  
10. The media will be stored in the My Media folder.  
3. Tap Home Media Hub  
.
4. Read the Terms and Conditions screen and tap the  
agree to the Terms and Conditions checkbox.  
5. Tap Accept to continue or Decline to exit.  
The Media Hub screen displays.  
I
Media Hub Notices  
Any media item (Media Content) may be rented or purchased after  
you create an account in Media Hub.  
Media Content that is downloaded may be viewed concurrently on  
up to five (5) devices with Media Hub that are also registered to  
the same account.  
6. At the Media Hub screen, What’s New is displayed with  
recently added media that you can rent or purchase.  
7. The following tabs are displayed at the top of the  
screen:  
You may choose to remove a device from your account no more  
than once every 90 days.  
• Home: displays the Media Hub main screen.  
You may remove Media Content from a device as many times as  
you’d like. You will have the ability to re-download the Media  
Content at a later point in time subject to content re-download  
availability and studio permissions.  
• Movies: displays movies that are available for rent or purchase.  
Scroll through the top navigation bar and select a movie  
category. The movies of that type will be displayed below.  
• TV Shows: displays TV shows that are available for purchase.  
Scroll through the top navigation bar and select a TV category.  
The TV shows of that type will be displayed below.  
• My Media: allows you to view all of the media that you have  
purchased or rented. Tap a media entry to view it.  
You MUST be in network coverage to license Media Content you  
have acquired through the Service.  
You can use 3G, 4G, or Wi-Fi connectivity in order to download  
Media Content.  
Unlike purchased Media Content, rented Media Content will be  
viewable on only 1 device in your account.  
8. Scroll through the media listings and tap on an item  
you would like to purchase or rent.  
87  
Media Content is downloaded and saved onto the SD card.  
Your Media Content may pause/stop or not download in networks  
where there is a weak signal.  
Music Hub  
The Music Hub app lets you upload your music collection to  
the cloud, stream and purchase songs from an extensive  
catalog, and listen to personal radio.  
You may begin watching downloaded Media Content as soon as a)  
license acquisition has occurred and b) sufficient amount of the  
Media Content has been buffered.  
Note: You must sign up for an account before accessing some  
of the Music Hub options.  
You must finish watching rented Media Content within 24  
consecutive hours of start of playback.  
1. Sign on to your Samsung account if you have not  
Stopping, pausing or restarting rented Media Content does not  
extend the available viewing time.  
In no event will rented Media Content be available for a period  
of more than thirty (30) days (or shorter on a title-by-title basis)  
after the Media Content has been rented (e.g., if you begin  
viewing rented Media Content on the 29th day after the rental  
transaction, but do not finish viewing the entire title, that rented  
Media Content may not be available for the entire twenty-four  
(24) consecutive hour period if such period would extend the  
viewable time beyond the thirty (30) day rental window).  
2. From the Home screen, tap  
Music Hub  
.
3. Read the introduction material and tap Continue to  
continue. Tap Music Hub Video to watch a helpful video  
about Music Hub.  
The Music Hub Home screen displays.  
4. Tap one of the following options:  
• Featured: This is the Music Hub home screen. Displays top  
albums, featured albums, top tracks, new releases, and more.  
Tap an item to display more information and prices.  
• Genres: Displays bestsellers and new releases by genre, such  
as pop, rock, jazz, comedy, and blues.  
You cannot play any media content downloaded from Media Hub  
through any output on your mobile phone, including All Share.  
Multimedia  
88  
   
• Playlists: Displays downloaded playlists and your library of  
songs and albums. Tap New to create a new playlist.  
• My page: Displays the following options:  
Making a Purchase  
You can use Music Hub to buy albums or individual tracks.  
You can also build your own album from various tracks.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Music Hub  
.
Basket: Displays songs that you have selected to buy. Tap Buy  
to start the purchase process. Tap Menu Delete all to clear  
2. Select an album or a track.  
your basket or tap Remove to delete songs from your basket.  
Purchase List: Displays a list of your purchases.  
3. Tap  
(Cart) next to an album to add the album to  
your basket or next to each track that you want to add  
to your basket.  
Payment information: Allows you to set up your payment  
method. Tap Add card to enter your payment information.  
Help: Display help information for Music Hub.  
4. Tap  
album.  
– or –  
5. Tap  
(Add) next to the album to add it to your  
Note: You have to be signed in to use some options.  
(Add) next to each track that you want to add  
To sign in, tap Sign in and use the keyboard to enter your  
to your album.  
Email address and Music Hub Password  
.
6. Tap New to create a new album.  
Tap Create account to set up a new account.  
Music Player  
5. Tap  
(Search) and use the keyboard to enter a key  
The Music Player is an application that can play music files.  
The Music Player supports files with extensions AAC, AAC+,  
eAAC+, MP3, WMA, 3GP, MP4, and M4A. Launching the  
Music Player allows you to navigate through your music  
library, play songs, and create playlists (music files bigger  
than 300 KB are displayed).  
word or phrase to search for tracks, albums, or artists.  
Tap  
on the keyboard to search Music Hub. Select  
an item to play a sample, add an item to your basket,  
or add an item to your album.  
89  
                     
Playing Music  
1. Tap  
Shuffle On: the current list of songs are randomly  
shuffled for playback.  
Music Player  
.
2. Tap a library category at the top of the screen (All,  
Playlists, Albums, Artists, Music square, or Folders) to  
view the available music files.  
Shuffle Off: songs play in order and are not  
shuffled.  
Provides access to the Music square.  
Lists the current playlist songs.  
3. Scroll through the list of songs and tap an entry to  
begin playback.  
Displays the current song in the player window.  
Provides access to the SoundAlive feature.  
4. The following Music Player controls are available:  
Pause the song.  
Start the song after being paused.  
Music Player Options  
To access additional options, follow these steps:  
Press and hold to rewind the song. Tap to go to  
previous song.  
1. While in the Music Player, press  
.
Pressandholdtofast-forward thesong.Taptogo  
to next song.  
Volume control.  
2. The follow options are available:  
• Add to quick list: adds the current music file to the Quick list.  
• Via Bluetooth: scans for devices and pairs with a Bluetooth  
headset.  
Repeat one: repeats the currently playing song.  
Repeat all: replays the current list when the list  
ends.  
• Share via: allows you to share your music by using Bluetooth,  
Email, Gmail, Group Cast, Messaging, or Wi-Fi Direct.  
• Add to playlist: allows you to add the current music file to a  
selected playlist.  
Play All: plays the current song list once.  
Multimedia  
90  
• Details: allows you to view media info such as Artist, Title,  
Biography, and other information.  
• Music menu: this menu allows you to select which categories  
you want to display. Choices are: Albums, Artists, Genres,  
Music square, Folders, Composers, Years, Most played,  
Recently played, or Recently added. Tap each item that you  
want to display in the Music menu.  
• Set as: allows you to set a music file to Phone ringtone, Caller  
ringtone, or Alarm tone.  
• Settings: allows you to change your Music Player settings. For  
• Lyrics: when activated, the lyrics of the song are displayed if  
available.  
• Music auto off: when activated, music will automatically turn  
off after a set interval.  
• End: allows you to end the Music Player app.  
Music Player Settings  
Using Playlists  
The Music Player Settings menu allows you to set  
preferences for the Music Player such as whether you want  
the music to play in the background, sound effects, and how  
the music menu displays.  
Playlists are used to assign songs to a list of preferred media  
which can then be grouped into a list for later playback.  
These Playlists can be created via either the handset’s Music  
Player options menu or from within a 3rd party music  
application (such as Windows Media Player) and then  
downloaded to the handset.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
2. Press Settings  
3. Select one of the following settings:  
Music Player  
.
.
Creating a Playlist  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
• SoundAlive: set a type of equalization such as Normal, Pop,  
Rock, Jazz, Dance, Classic, etc.  
Music Player  
.
2. Tap the Playlists tab.  
• Play speed: set the play speed anywhere between 0.5X and  
2.0X using the slider.  
3. Press  
Create playlist.  
4. Type a name for this playlist in the field and tap OK  
.
91  
         
To edit a playlist:  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Adding Music to a Playlist  
Music Player  
.
To add files to the playlist:  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
2. Tap the Playlists tab.  
2. Tap Playlists  
3. Press  
4. Tap a playlist name to edit.  
5. Enter a new name for the playlist then tap OK  
.
Music Player  
.
Edit title.  
3. Tap the playlist name in which to add music.  
4. Tap Add music  
5. Tap a music file, or tap Select all to add all the music  
.
.
For information on downloading music for your phone, see  
tracks to this playlist then tap Done  
.
Google Play Music  
Removing Music from a Playlist  
To remove music files from a playlist:  
With Google Play Music, you can play music that you have  
added to your music file as well as any music you copied  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Music Player  
.
from your PC. While offline, you can listen to music you have  
copied from your PC.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
2. Tap the Playlists tab.  
3. Tap the playlist name in which to delete music.  
4. Press Remove  
Play Music  
.
.
2. At the Welcome screen, tap Next  
.
5. Tap the checkbox to the left of each track you want to  
3. At the Select an account screen, tap an account that  
remove from this playlist, or tap Select all to remove all  
the music tracks from this playlist, then tap Remove  
you would like to link to Google Play Music or tap Add  
.
Account  
.
Editing a Playlist  
Besides adding and removing music files in a playlist, you  
can also rename the playlist.  
4. At the Get free music screen, tap Get free songs or Skip  
5. Follow the on-screen instructions for getting your free  
music.  
.
Multimedia  
92  
       
All music on your device and external SD card is  
displayed including Music folders that may contain  
multiple songs.  
3. The video will begin to play.  
4. The following video controls are available:  
Pause the video.  
6. Tap a song to start playback.  
Start the video after being paused.  
7. From the main Play Music screen, you can tap any of  
the following tabs for a more detailed listing of songs:  
Recent, Artists, Albums, Songs, Playlists, and Genres.  
Press and hold to rewind the video. Tap to  
go to previous video.  
Press and hold to fast-forward the video.  
Tap to go to next video.  
Volume control.  
8. Tap  
for the following options:  
• Shuffle all: allows you to play all of your music in a shuffled  
order.  
PIP (Picture In Picture) view. The video will  
be played in a small window so you can use  
your phone for other purposes while watching  
the video. Double-tap screen to return to  
previous size.  
• Settings: allows you to view Open source licenses and the  
music version for the Play Music application.  
• Help: allows you to view a help file on the Google Support  
website.  
Video Player  
The Video Player application plays video files stored on your  
microSD card.  
Originalsizeview. Thevideowillbeplayedin  
its original size.  
Full-screen in ratio view. The video is  
enlarged as much as possible without  
becoming distorted.  
1. Tap  
Video Player  
.
2. All videos that you have on your phone and memory  
card will be displayed. Tap the video that you want to  
play.  
93  
   
5. Tap the TV SHOWS tab to view shows you can rent.  
6. Tap the PERSONAL VIDEOS tab to view movies you have  
on your phone or memory card.  
Full-screen view. The entire screen is used,  
which may cause some minor distortion.  
7. Press  
for additional options.  
Note: The screen view icons are a three-way toggle. The icon  
that is displayed, is the mode that will appear after the  
icon is tapped.  
Gallery  
The Gallery is where you view photos and play back videos.  
For photos, you can also perform basic editing tasks, view a  
slideshow, set photos as wallpaper or contact image, and  
share as a picture message.  
For more information on downloading videos for your phone,  
1. Tap  
Gallery  
.
Play Movies & TV  
All of the Albums that hold your pictures and videos will  
be displayed with folder name and number of files.  
With Google Play Movies & TV, you can rent thousands of  
different movies and television shows. You can watch  
instantly, or download your movie or show for offline viewing  
at a later time.  
2. Tap an Album and thumbnails of the contents will be  
displayed.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Play Movies & TV  
Note: If your device displays that the memory is full when you  
access Gallery, delete some of the files by using My files  
or other file management applications and try again. For  
.
2. Log on to your Google account if you have not already  
done so.  
3. Following the on-screen instructions for renting and  
viewing movies and TV shows.  
4. Tap the MOVIES tab to view movies you can rent.  
Multimedia  
94  
         
1. Tap a video to select it.  
Viewing Pictures  
1. From the main gallery, tap Slideshow  
slideshow of all of your pictures.  
2. Tap a thumbnail to view a single picture.  
to see a  
2. Tap  
to play the video.  
3. Press  
for additional options.  
For video player controls, see “Video Player” on  
Note: If no control icons are displayed on the screen in  
addition to the picture, tap anywhere on the screen to  
display them.  
Using S Beam to Share Pictures  
This feature (when activated via NFC) allows you to beam  
large files directly to another compatible device that is in  
direct contact. These files can be larger, such as Videos, HD  
pictures, and other large files.You can beam images and  
videos from your gallery, music files from your music player,  
and more.  
3. The following options are available at the top of the  
screen:  
• Camera  
• Share via  
: activates the camera.  
: allows you to share the picture via AT&T  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
settings NFC  
2. If not already active, in a single motion touch and slide  
the NFC slider to the right to turn it on  
Settings  
More  
Locker, Bluetooth, ChatON, Email, Flipboard, Gmail, Google+,  
Messaging, Picasa, S Note or Wi-Fi Direct.  
.
• Delete  
4. Press  
: allows you to delete the picture.  
.
ON  
for additional options.  
3. Tap S Beam and make sure the feature is turned on.  
Viewing Videos  
4. If not already active, in a single motion touch and slide  
the S Beam slider to the right to turn it on  
5. On the source device (containing the desired image or  
video), tap Gallery  
.
ON  
Note: If no control icons are displayed on the screen in  
addition to the picture, tap anywhere on the screen to  
display them.  
.
95  
                 
6. Locate and tap the selected image to open it in the  
7. Place the two active NFC-enabled devices back to back  
preview window.  
to begin (1).  
Important! Neither device must be in Lock mode or displaying  
the Lock screen. They must both be active and  
unlocked. It is recommended that the target device  
be on the Home screen.  
Note: If the Touch to beam screen does not appear on the  
source device:  
- Pull them apart  
- Verify the image is visible in the preview window on  
the source device (providing the file)  
- Place them together again  
Place devices back to back  
8. From the Touch to beam screen, tap the reduced image  
preview to begin the transfer (2).  
9. When prompted, separate the two devices. After a few  
seconds (depending on file size) the recipient with then  
see the transferred file displayed on their screen.  
Touch to beam  
To share multiple pictures via S Beam:  
1. On the source device (containing the desired image or  
video), tap  
Gallery  
.
2. Locate the selected folder.  
3. Touch and hold the first image and place a checkmark  
on it and all desired images.  
Tap the source image  
Multimedia  
96  
 
4. Place the two active NFC-enabled devices back to back  
to begin.  
Using the Camera  
Taking Photos  
5. From the Touch to beam screen, tap the reduced image  
preview to begin the transfer.  
Taking pictures with your device’s built-in camera is as  
simple as choosing a subject, pointing the camera, then  
pressing the camera key.  
When prompted, separate the two devices.  
Camera  
Note: When taking a photo in direct sunlight or in bright  
This section explains how to use the camera on your phone.  
You can take photographs and shoot video by using the built-  
in camera functionality. Your 8 megapixel camera produces  
photos in JPEG format.  
conditions, shadows may appear on the photo.  
1. From the main Home screen, tap  
Camera  
to activate the camera mode.  
2. Using the phone’s main display screen as a viewfinder,  
adjust the image by aiming the camera at the subject.  
3. Before you take a picture, use the Up and Down Volume  
keys to zoom in or out. You can magnify the picture up  
to x4 (400 percent).  
Important! Do not take photos of people without their  
permission.  
Do not take photos in places where cameras are  
not allowed.  
Do not take photos in places where you may  
interfere with another person’s privacy.  
– or –  
Pinch the screen to zoom out or pinch outwards to  
zoom in.  
4. If desired, before taking the photo, you can tap  
on-screen icons to access various camera options and  
settings.  
97  
           
5. You can also tap the screen to move the focus to the  
area you touch.  
8. Press  
to return to the viewfinder.  
Camera Options  
Options are represented by icons across both sides of the  
screen.  
6. Press the Camera key ( ) until the shutter sounds.  
(The picture is automatically stored within your  
designated storage location. If no microSD is installed,  
all pictures are stored on the Phone.) For more  
Camera / Camcorder Mode: allows you to take a photo  
in various modes. Once you change the mode, the  
corresponding indicator appears at the top left of the  
display. Slide the button up for Camera, or down for  
Camcorder.  
Front  
Facing  
Camera  
Charger on Storage Location  
Mode  
Self-portrait: allows you to activate the front facing  
camera so you can take pictures of yourself or video  
chat.  
Flash  
Camera  
Key  
Shooting  
Mode  
Effects  
Flash: allows you to set the flash options to Off, On, or  
Auto flash.  
Image  
Viewer  
A
Settings  
Shooting mode: allows you to set the shooting mode to  
Display Image  
one of the following:  
7. While viewing a picture, after you have taken it, pinch  
the screen outwards to zoom in or pinch the screen  
inwards to zoom out.  
Single shot: takes a single photo and view it before  
returning to the shooting mode.  
You can magnify the picture up to x4.  
Multimedia  
98  
   
Best photo: takes 8 photographs in quick  
succession and allows you to select and save the  
best.  
Beauty: adjusts the contrast to smooth facial  
features.  
Smile shot: the camera focuses on the face of your  
subject. Once the camera detects the person’s  
smile, it takes the picture.  
Best Face: takes 5 photographs in quick  
succession and selects the best photograph based  
on open eyes, smiles, sudden movement, etc.  
Low light: allows you to take better pictures when  
Face detection: double tap on a face to zoom in or  
out.  
the light is low.  
Effects: allows you to change the color tone or apply  
specialeffectstothephoto. Optionsinclude:Noeffect,  
Coldvintage, Warmvintage,Posterize, Solarize, Green  
point, Blue point, Red-yellow point, Washed out,  
Cartoonify, Black and white, Sepia, and Negative.  
Panorama: takes a landscape photo by taking an  
initial photo and then adding additional images to  
itself. The guide box lets you view the area where  
the second part of the panoramic picture should  
fall within.  
Share shot: uses Wi-Fi Direct to share your  
pictures quickly with your friends.  
Settings:  
Edit shortcuts: allows you to set shortcut icons for the  
settings that you use the most.  
HDR: takes pictures in HDR (High Dynamic Range)  
mode to increase image detail.  
Burst shot: takes 8 photographs in quick succession  
and allows you to select and save the best.  
Buddy photo share: uses face recognition from  
pictures in your contacts to send your friends or  
family pictures of themselves.  
Self-portrait: allows you to set the front camera so you  
can take pictures of yourself.  
99  
Flash: allows you to set the flash options to Off, On, or  
Auto flash.  
Timer: allows you to set a timer for how long to wait  
before taking a picture. Options include: Off, 2 sec, 5  
sec, and 10 sec.  
Shooting mode: allows you to set the shooting mode.  
Resolution: allows you to set the image size to either:  
8M (3264x2448), W6M (3264x1836),  
3.2M (2048x1536), W2.4M (2048x1152),  
W0.9M (1280x720), or 0.3M (640x480).  
Effects: allows you to change the color tone or apply  
specialeffectstothephoto. Optionsinclude:Noeffect,  
Coldvintage,Warmvintage,Posterize,Solarize,Green  
point, Blue point, Red-yellow point, Washed out,  
Cartoonify, Black and white, Sepia, and Negative.  
Whitebalance:allowsyoutosetthisoptiontooneofthe  
following choices: Auto, Daylight, Cloudy,  
Incandescent, or Fluorescent.  
Scenemode:allowsyoutosettheScenetohelptakethe  
best pictures possible. Options include None, Portrait,  
Landscape, Sports, Party/Indoor, Beach/Snow,  
Sunset, Dawn, Autumn Color, Text, and Candlelight.  
Helpful tips are shown for each scene mode at the  
bottom of the display screen.  
ISO:ISOdetermineshowsensitivethelight meterison  
yourdigitalcamera. ChoosefromAuto, 100, 200, 400,  
or 800. Use a lower ISO number to make your camera  
less sensitive to light, a higher ISO number to take  
photos with less light, or Auto to let the camera  
automatically adjust the ISO for each of your shots.  
Exposure value: allows you to adjust the brightness  
level by moving the slider.  
Metering: allows you to set how the camera measures  
ormetersthelightsource:Matrix,Center-weighted,or  
Spot.  
Focus mode:allows you to set this option to Auto focus  
or Macro. Use Macro mode to take close-up pictures.  
Multimedia  
100  
Outdoor visibility: allows you to maximize your photos  
Shuttersound:allowsyoutosettheShuttersoundtoOn  
taken while outdoors.  
or Off.  
Contextual filename: allows you to have your location  
added as part of the filename. You must first activate  
GPS tag described above.  
Auto contrast: provides a clear image even under  
backlight circumstances where intensity of  
illumination can vary excessively.  
Guidelines: allows you to turn the guidelines On or Off.  
Take photos using voice: allows you to take photos  
using your voice. You can use words such as Capture,  
Shoot, Smile, and Cheese.  
Auto share shot: allows you to easily connect to the  
devices you wantto share pictures withand thenbring  
the devices back together (back to back) to connect  
them.  
Save as flipped: when set to On, this option allows you  
to take and save a mirror-image photo.  
Anti-Shake: reduces image blur due to the movement  
Image quality: allows you to set the image quality to:  
of the subject of the photo or hand movement.  
Superfine, Fine, or Normal.  
GPS tag: allows you to turn GPS On or Off (also known  
as Geotagging). The location of where the picture is  
taken is attached to the picture. (Only available in  
Camera mode.) Before you can use the GPS tag  
Storage: allows you to configure the default storage  
location for images or videos as either Phone or  
Memory card (if inserted).  
Reset: allows you to reset all camera or camcorder  
settings to the default values.  
(Geotagging), from the Home screen tap  
Settings Locationservices andtapUseGPSsatellites  
to create a checkmark.  
101  
Shooting Video  
Image viewer: allows you to access the Image viewer  
and the various viewing options for a selected picture.  
Image viewer options are described in the following  
section. The last picture you took, will be displayed as  
a thumbnail in the Image viewer icon.  
Tip: When shooting video in direct sunlight or in bright  
conditions, it is recommended that you provide your  
subject with sufficient light by having the light source  
behind you.  
Viewing your Pictures  
After you take a photo, you can access various options from  
the Image Viewer. The Image Viewer uses your Gallery. For  
1. From the main Home screen, tap Camera  
to  
activate the camera mode.  
2. Touch and drag the Camera mode button down to  
Camcorder Mode.  
Using the Camcorder  
In addition to taking photos, the camera also doubles as a  
camcorder that also allows you to record, view, and send  
videos.  
3. Tap the Recording mode that you prefer. Select  
between Normal, Limit for MMS, Slow motion, or Fast  
motion.  
4. Using the phone’s main display screen as a viewfinder,  
adjust the image by aiming the camcorder at the  
subject.  
Note: The camera may not be able to properly record videos to  
a memory card with a slow transfer speed.  
5. Before you take a video, use the Up and Down Volume  
keys to zoom in or out. You can magnify the video up to  
x4 (400 percent).  
– or –  
Multimedia  
102  
       
Pinch the screen to zoom out or pinch outwards to  
zoom in.  
Camcorder Options  
Options are represented by icons across both sides of the  
screen.  
6. Tap the Video key ( ) to begin shooting video. The red  
light will blink while recording.  
Camera / Camcorder Mode: allows you to take a photo  
in various modes. Once you change the mode, the  
corresponding indicator appears at the top left of the  
display. Slide the button up for Camera, or down for  
Camcorder.  
7. You can tap the screen to move the focus to the area  
you touch.  
8. Tap  
focus on the middle of the screen.  
9. To capture an image from the video while recording,  
tap . This feature is not available when the anti-  
to turn on auto focus. This will automatically  
Live Shooting: takes a photo during a video recording  
session in Camcorder mode. You can view the photo in  
your image viewer or Gallery.  
shake feature is activated.  
10. Tap the Video key ( ) again to stop the recording and  
save the video file to your Camera folder.  
Self portrait: allows you to activate the front facing  
camerasoyoucantakevideosofyourselforvideochat.  
11. Once the file has been saved, tap the image viewer,  
then tap  
12. Press  
to play your video for review.  
to return to the viewer.  
Flash: allows you to set the flash options to Off or On.  
When you set the flash to On, it stays on continually  
while you are taking a video.  
Recording mode: allows you to set the recording mode  
to: Normal, Limit for MMS, Slow motion, and Fast  
motion.  
103  
     
Effects: allows you to change the color tone or apply  
special effects to the video. Options include: No effect,  
Coldvintage,Warmvintage,Posterize,Solarize,Green  
point, Blue point, Red-yellow point, Washed out,  
Cartoonify, Black and white, Sepia, and Negative.  
Effects: allows you to change the color tone or apply  
special effects to the video. Options include: No effect,  
Coldvintage,Warmvintage,Posterize,Solarize,Green  
point, Blue point, Red-yellow point, Washed out,  
Cartoonify, Black and white, Sepia, and Negative.  
Settings:  
Exposure value: allows you to adjust the brightness  
level by moving the slider.  
Edit shortcuts: allows you to set shortcut icons for the  
settings that you use the most.  
Timer: allows you to set a timer for how long to wait  
beforetakingavideo.Optionsinclude:Off,2sec,5sec,  
and 10 sec.  
Self-recording: allows you to set the front camera so  
you can take videos of yourself or video chat.  
Resolution: allows you to set the image size to either:  
1920x1080, 1280x720, 720x480, 640x480, or  
320x240.  
Flash: allows you to set the flash options to Off or On.  
When you set the flash to On, it stays on continually  
while you are taking a video.  
Recording mode: allows you to set the recording mode  
to: Normal, which is limited only by available space on  
thedestinationlocation;LimitforMMS,whichislimited  
by MMS size restrictions; Slow motion, which records  
in slow motion; and Fast motion, which records in fast  
motion.  
Multimedia  
104  
Whitebalance:allowsyoutosetthisoptiontooneofthe  
following choices: Auto, Daylight, Cloudy,  
Incandescent, or Fluorescent.  
Save as flipped: when set to On, this option allows you  
totakeandsaveamirror-imagevideowhenusingself-  
recording mode.  
Outdoor visibility: allows you to maximize your photos  
Video quality: allows you to set the image quality to:  
taken while outdoors.  
Superfine, Fine, or Normal.  
Guidelines: allows you to turn the guidelines On or Off.  
Storage: allows you to configure the default storage  
location for images or videos as either Phone or  
Memory card (if inserted).  
Anti-Shake: reduces image blur due to the movement  
of the subject of the photo or hand movement.  
GPS tag: allows you to turn GPS On or Off (also known  
as Geotagging). The location of where the picture is  
taken is attached to the picture. (Only available in  
Camera mode.) Before you can use the GPS tag  
Reset: allows you to reset all camera or camcorder  
settings to the default values.  
Image viewer: allows you to access the Image viewer  
and the various viewing options for a selected video.  
Image viewer options are described in the following  
section. The last video you took, will be displayed as a  
thumbnail in the Image viewer icon.  
(Geotagging), from the Home screen tap  
Settings Locationservices andtapUseGPSsatellites  
to create a checkmark.  
Contextual filename: allows you to have your location  
added as part of the filename. You must first activate  
GPS tag described above.  
Viewing your Videos  
After you take a video, you can access various options from  
the Image Viewer. The Image Viewer uses your Gallery and  
105  
 
Section 7: Messaging  
This section describes how to send and receive different  
types of messages. It also includes the features and  
functionality associated with messaging.  
The Multimedia Messaging Service (MMS) lets you send and  
receive multimedia messages (such as picture, video, and  
audio messages) to and from other mobile phones or email  
addresses. To use this feature, you may need to subscribe to  
your service provider’s multimedia message service.  
Types of Messages  
Your phone provides the following message types:  
Text Messages  
Important! When creating a message, adding an image, a  
sound file, or a video clip to a text message  
changes the message from a text message to a  
multimedia message.  
Multimedia (Picture, Video, and Audio) Messages  
Email and Gmail Messages  
AT&T Messages  
Google Talk  
Messaging icons are displayed at the top of the screen and  
indicate when messages are received and their type. For  
Google+ and Messenger Messages  
ChatON  
Creating and Sending Messages  
The Short Message Service (SMS) lets you send and receive  
text messages to and from other mobile phones or email  
addresses. To use this feature, you may need to subscribe to  
your service provider’s message service.  
1. From the main Home screen, tap Messaging  
Compose  
.
Messaging  
106  
           
4. Tap the Enter message field and use the on-screen  
keypad to enter a message. For more information, refer  
Note: The main Home screen initially contains the Messaging  
icon. If you delete it, or if you want to access  
Messaging from another Home screen, you must tap  
5. Add more recipients by tapping the recipient field.  
Apps  
Messaging  
.
6. Review your message and tap Send  
.
2. Tap on the Enter recipient field to manually enter a  
Note: If you exit a message before you send it, it will be  
recipient or tap  
Contacts.  
to select a recipient from your  
automatically saved as a draft.  
3. If adding a recipient from your Contacts, tap the  
contact to place a checkmark then tap Done  
Message Options  
.
Options before composing a message  
The contact will be placed in the recipient field.  
1. From the main Home screen, tap Messaging  
.
Note: For the Group option, if the number of recipients is less  
than 10, all members in the group will be added. You will  
need to delete any unnecessary members in the list by  
selecting the trash can icon and deleting unwanted  
entries.  
2. Before composing a message, press  
to reveal  
additional messaging options:  
• Search: allows you to search through all of your messages for  
a certain word or string of words. Enter a search string in the  
Messaging Search window and tap  
.
• Delete threads: allows you to delete any message thread.  
Note: Enter additional recipients by separating each entry with  
Select the messages to delete and a green checkmark will  
a semicolon (;) then using the previous procedure.  
appear next to the message. Tap Delete  
.
• Draft messages: displays the draft messages folder and its  
contents.  
107  
         
• Scheduled messages: displays the scheduled messages  
folder and its contents.  
• Add to Contacts: allows you to add the recipient to your  
Contacts list. This option only appears if the recipient is not  
already in your Contacts list.  
• Locked messages: displays the locked messages folder and  
its contents.  
• View contact: allows you to see information on the recipient.  
This option only appears if the recipient is in your Contacts list.  
• Add slide: allows you to add a new page to a message.  
• Add recipients: allows you to add additional recipients.  
• Scheduled Message: allows you to assign the current  
message for scheduled delivery at a designated time.  
• Delete message: allows you to delete the message.  
• Register number as spam: allows you to register the number  
as spam.  
• Spam messages: displays the spam messages folder and its  
contents.  
• Settings: allows you to access Messaging settings. For more  
Options while composing a message  
1. While composing a message, press  
to reveal  
additional messaging options.  
• Call: allows you to call the contact. This option only appears if  
you have entered a phone number for the recipient.  
• Insert smiley: allows you to add emoticons, such as a happy  
face to your message.  
• Remove from spam number list: allows you to unregister a  
number from the spam number list. This option only appears if  
the number was previously registered as spam.  
• Add text: allows you to copy text from your contacts, calendar,  
or from a memo to add to your message. This is a convenient  
feature for adding names, phone numbers, events, etc. to your  
• Discard: allows you to delete the message.  
Adding attachments to a message  
To add an attachment to your message, tap  
one of the following options:  
Images: allows you to tap an existing image from your Pictures  
list to add it to your message.  
and select  
Messaging  
108  
         
Take picture: allows you to temporarily exit the message, take a  
photo with phone’s camera, and then add it to your message by  
Adding Additional Text  
You can copy text such as names, phone numbers, and  
tapping Save  
Video: allows you to choose an existing video from the Videos list,  
then add it to your message  
.
events from your Contacts, Calendar or a Memo.  
1. While composing a message, press  
Add text.  
.
2. At the Add text screen, select one of the following:  
• S Note: allows you to insert text from an existing S Note.  
• Calendar: allows you to add the name, date, and time of a  
calendar event to your message.  
Capture video: allows you to temporarily exit the message,  
record a video clip using the phone’s camera, and then add it  
to your message by tapping Save  
.
Audio: allows you to choose an existing audio file from the  
Audio list, then add it to your message by tapping the circle to  
• Location: allows you to add an address and the link to the  
location on Google Maps.  
the right of the audio so that it turns green, then tapping Done  
Record audio: allows you to temporarily exit the message and  
record an audio clip using the phone’s microphone. It is then  
automatically attached to the message.  
.
• Contacts: allows you to add the name and phone number of  
any of your contacts to your message.  
Text templates: allows you to add pre-defined phrases and  
sentences.  
S Note: allows you to add an S Note that you have created.  
Calendar: allows you to add an event from your calendar. Select  
The information is added to your message.  
Viewing New Received Messages  
1. When you receive a new message, the new message  
icon will appear at the top of your screen.  
2. Open the Notification Bar and select the message. For  
the desired event and tap Done  
.
Location: allows you to attach a thumbnail of a map showing  
your location.  
Contacts: allows you to tap on an existing Address Book entry,  
then add it to your message by tapping Done  
.
109  
   
– or –  
• View contact: displays the contact’s information. This option  
only displays if the sender is in your Contacts list.  
• Add to Contacts: displays the Contacts information screen.  
This option only displays if the sender is not in your Contacts  
list.  
From the main Home screen, tap Messaging  
tap the new message to view it.  
then  
The selected message appears in the display.  
3. To play a multimedia message, tap  
.
• Delete thread: displays a confirmation dialog box that when  
pressed, deletes the entire thread.  
To pause playback of the multimedia message, tap  
.
4. To scroll through the message (if additional text pages  
have been added), touch the screen and in a single  
motion, scroll up or down the page.  
• Register number as spam: allows you to register the number  
as spam.  
• Remove from spam number list: allows you to unregister a  
number from the spam number list. This option only appears if  
the number was previously registered as spam.  
Message Threads  
Sent and received text and picture messages are grouped  
into message threads. Threaded messages allow you to see  
all the messages exchanged (similar to a chat program) and  
displays a contact on the screen. Message threads are listed  
in the order in which they were received, with the latest  
message displayed at the top.  
Deleting Messages  
Deleting a single message thread  
1. From the main Home screen, tap Messaging  
.
2. Touch and hold a message, then tap Delete thread  
.
To open a threaded message follow these steps:  
3. At the Delete prompt, tap OK to delete or Cancel to  
1. From the main Home screen, tap Messaging  
.
cancel.  
Tap the message thread you want to view.  
2. Touch and hold the message thread to display the  
following options:  
Messaging  
110  
   
Deleting multiple message threads  
Messaging Settings  
To configure the settings for text messages, multimedia  
messages, Voice mails, and Push messages.  
1. From the main Home screen, tap Messaging  
.
2. Press  
Delete threads.  
1. From the main Home screen, tap Messaging  
3. Tap each message you want to delete. A checkmark  
Settings.  
will appear beside each message you select.  
2. The following Messaging settings are available:  
4. Tap Delete  
.
Display:  
5. At the Delete prompt, tap OK to delete or Cancel to  
cancel.  
• Bubble style: allows you to choose from several bubble styles  
for your messages. Bubbles are the rounded boxes that  
surround each message.  
Message Search  
You can search through your messages by using the  
Message Search feature.  
1. From the main Home screen, tap Messaging  
2. Tap Search  
3. Use the on-screen keypad to enter a word or phrase to  
search for, then tap  
• Background style: allows you to choose from several  
background styles for your messages.  
.
.
• Split view: when in Landscape mode, allows you to view both  
the message list and the contents of the currently selected  
message.  
.
• Use the volume key: allows you to change the text size by  
using the up or down volume keys.  
4. All messages that contain the search string you  
entered are displayed.  
General settings:  
• Delete old messages: deletes old messages when the limit is  
reached, rather than having them overwritten.  
111  
         
Text message limit: allows you to set a limit on how many text  
messages can be in one conversation.  
Restricted: you can only create and submit messages with  
content belonging to the Core MM Content Domain.  
Warning: the phone will warn you via pop up messages that  
you are creating a multimedia message which does not fit the  
Core MM Content Domain.  
• Multimedia message limit: allows you to set a limit on how  
many multimedia messages can be in one conversation.  
Text templates: allows you to edit or add new text templates to  
use in your messaging.  
Free: you may add any content to the message.  
Text message (SMS) settings:  
• MMS alert: allows you to receive an alert when MMS mode  
becomes active.  
• Manage SIM card messages: allows you to manage the  
messages that you have stored on your SIM card.  
• Message center: allows you to enter the number of your  
Message center where your messages reside while the system  
is attempting to deliver them.  
Push message settings:  
• Push messages: allows you to receive push messages from  
the network.  
Cell Broadcast (CB) settings:  
• Input mode: allows you to set the input mode for your text  
messages. Choose between GSM Alphabet, Unicode, or  
Automatic.  
• CB activation: allows you to receive Cell Broadcast (CB)  
messages.  
• Channel configuration: allows you to set up the channel that  
you will receive CB messages on.  
Multimedia message (MMS) settings:  
• Auto-retrieve: allows the message system to retrieve  
messages automatically.  
Notifications settings:  
• Notifications: allows you to see message notifications on your  
status bar.  
• Creation mode: allows you to select the creation mode, Free,  
Restricted, or Warning.  
Messaging  
112  
• Select ringtone: allows you to set the ringtone for your  
message notifications.  
• Block unknown senders: when active, automatically blocks  
incoming messages from unknown sources or blocked numbers.  
• Vibrate: allows you to configure the vibration mode associated  
with message alerts.  
Using Email  
Email enables you to review and create email using various  
email services. You can also receive text message alerts  
when you receive an important email.  
• Message alert repetition: allows you to set the interval for new  
message alerts. Choose from: Once, Every 2 minutes, or Every  
10 minutes.  
Creating an Email Account  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
• Preview message: when enabled, allows you to view a  
preview of new message text on the Status bar.  
Signature settings:  
Email  
.
Your accounts screen displays with an Email setup  
screen displayed.  
• Add signature: when enabled, this feature allows you to create  
a signature at the end of your outgoing text messages.  
• Signature text: allows you to enter a desired signature for your  
message.  
2. Enter you email address in the Email address field.  
3. Enter your password in the Password field.  
4. If you want to see your password as it is being typed,  
tap Show password to create a checkmark.  
Spam message settings:  
5. Tap Next  
.
• Spam settings: when enabled, allows you to configure  
available spam settings such as:  
6. At the Account options screen, tap any of the options  
you would like.  
• Register number as spam: allows you to manually enter and  
assign a phone number as being sent from a spam source.  
• Register phrase as spam: allows you to assign a specific text  
phrase as belonging to a spam message. Ex: Dear friend.  
7. Tap Next  
8. Enter a name for this email account (optional).  
9. Tap Done  
.
.
113  
                     
10. Enter the desired information in the different fields,  
then tap Next  
11. Enter an Account name for this account (Optional) and  
tap Done  
Wait for the Inbox to synchronize before use.  
12. Press Settings to change the account settings.  
Creating a Corporate Email Account  
Use the following procedure to configure your phone to  
synchronize with a corporate email account.  
.
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Email  
.
.
Your accounts screen displays with an Email setup  
screen displayed.  
2. Enter you email address in the Email address field.  
3. Enter your password in the Password field.  
4. If you want to see your password as it is being typed,  
tap Show password to create a checkmark.  
5. If you want all of your emails sent from this email  
account by default, tap checkbox to create a  
checkmark.  
Creating Additional Email Accounts  
To create additional email accounts after setting up your first  
account, follow these steps:  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Email  
.
Your Email screen displays showing your emails from  
the active account.  
2. Press  
Settings  
.
6. Tap Manual setup  
.
3. Tap  
to add another email account.  
7. Tap the Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync field.  
4. Enter the information required to set up another  
8. Enter all the Exchange server information, Domain,  
User name and Password, then tap Next  
9. At the Activation prompt, tap OK  
The Account options screen is displayed.  
.
.
Messaging  
114  
   
Switching Between Email Accounts  
1. From the Home screen, tap Email  
Signing into Your Gmail  
.
Note: You must sign in to your Gmail account in order to  
Your Email screen displays showing your emails from  
the active account.  
access Gmail.  
2. Tap the Inbox button at the top of your screen that  
displays the optional name you assigned to your active  
email account, for example, Work, Gmail, etc.  
Your Email accounts screen is displayed.  
1. Sign on to your Google account if you are not already  
2. From the Home screen, tap  
Gmail  
.
3. Follow the on-screen instructions.  
3. Tap the Email account you would like to switch to. You  
can also select Combined view which will display email  
messages from all accounts.  
The Inbox loads conversations and email.  
Creating a Gmail Message  
1. From the Gmail Inbox, tap  
4. The new Email account is displayed.  
at the bottom of the  
screen to create a new message.  
Using Gmail  
2. Enter the recipients Email address in the To field.  
Separate multiple recipient email addresses with a  
comma.  
Gmail is Google’s web-based email. When you first setup the  
phone, Gmail is configured. Depending on the  
synchronization settings, Gmail is automatically synchronized  
with your Gmail account.  
3. Tap  
copy.  
and select Add Cc/Bcc to add a carbon or blind  
4. Enter the subject of this message in the Subject field.  
5. Tap the Compose email field and begin composing your  
message.  
115  
         
6. Tap  
to send.  
• Help: displays the Google.com webpage so you can search the  
web for help.  
Viewing a Gmail Message  
• Send feedback: allows you to send feedback or report a  
problem.  
1. From the Gmail Inbox, tap a message to view it.  
2. The following options are available at the bottom of the  
screen after a message has been selected:  
• Archive : archives the selected message.  
• Delete : deletes the message.  
Other Gmail Options  
1. Tap at the bottom of the screen to refresh the  
screen, send and receive new emails, and synchronize  
your email with the Gmail account.  
• Labels  
: allows you to attach labels to a message. This is  
2. Tap  
at the bottom of the screen to set up and  
similar to putting it in a folder.  
manage Labels for your Gmail messages.  
• Mark Unread  
: after reading a message, marks as unread.  
3. Tap  
at the bottom of the screen to search through  
• Newer: swipe your screen to the right to see newer messages.  
• Older: swipe your screen to the left to see older messages.  
your Gmail messages.  
Google Talk  
3. Press  
options:  
to select one of the following additional  
Google Talk is a free Windows and web-based application for  
instant messaging offered by Google. Conversation logs are  
automatically saved to a Chats area in your Gmail account.  
This allows you to search a chat log and store them in your  
Gmail accounts.  
• Mark important/not important: allows you to set the  
importance of a message.  
• Mute: allows you to mute the sound in a message if applicable.  
• Report spam: allows you to report a message as spam. Tap  
the UNDO option if you change your mind.  
1. Log on to your Google account if you have not already  
• Settings: displays Email settings that you can modify.  
Messaging  
116  
   
2. From the Home screen, tap  
Talk  
.
4. Follow the on-screen instructions to use Google+.  
3. Begin using Google Talk.  
5. Visit www.google.com/mobile/+/ for more information.  
4. Press  
Help for more information on using  
Messenger  
Google Talk.  
Messenger allows you to bring groups of friends together into  
a simple group conversation. When you get a new  
conversation in Messenger, Google+ sends an update to your  
phone.  
Note: The Network confirms your login and processes. This  
could take up to 5 minutes to complete.  
Google +  
Google+ makes messaging and sharing with your friends a  
lot easier. You can set up Circles of friends, visit the Stream  
to get updates from your Circles, use Messenger for fast  
messaging with everyone in your Circles, or use Instant  
Upload to automatically upload videos and photos to your  
own private album on Google+.  
2. From the Home screen, tap  
Messenger  
.
– or –  
From the Google+ application, select Messenger  
.
3. Tap Learn more for more detailed information.  
4. Select the account you want to use to sign in to  
Google+.  
– or –  
2. From the Home screen, tap  
Google+  
.
Tap Add account to create another account.  
3. Select the account you want to use to sign in to  
5. At the Messenger screen, tap  
to start a new  
Google+.  
– or –  
message.  
6. In the upper text field, enter a name, email address, or  
Tap Add account to create another account.  
circle.  
117  
         
7. In the bottom message field, enter a message then tap  
4. The first time you use Messages, you will need to set  
up a few things. Tap Record Greeting to record a  
personal greeting, or tap Skip if you want to do it later.  
5. Follow the on-screen instructions to use the Messages  
app.  
.
Messages App  
AT&T Messages brings your texts, calls, and voicemail  
messages together into a single conversation thread and is  
accessible by phone or computer.  
ChatON  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Messages  
.
Provides a global mobile communication service where you  
can chat with more than 2 buddies via a group chat. Share  
things such as pictures, videos, animation messages  
(Scribbles), audio, Contacts, Calendar entries, and Location  
information.  
2. Sign on to your Google account if you are not already  
Note: The first time you use the Messages app, you will need  
Important! The Samsung account manages the access  
information (username/password) to several  
applications, such as AllShare Play, ChatON, and  
Media Hub.  
to download the updated application from the Play  
Store. When the Play Store page displays, tap Update  
.
For more information, visit: https://web.samsungchaton.com  
.
3. At the Welcome screen, read the information and tap  
Continue or tap Learn More to receive more  
information.  
Registering with the Service  
1. Confirm you have already logged in to your Samsung  
account.  
Messaging  
118  
           
Adding Your First Chat On Buddy  
1. From the Home screen, tap ChatON  
2. Tap Add buddy and choose a search method.  
• Address : to search by Country code and phone number.  
Note: There should be no  
(Samsung account icon) in the  
.
Notifications area of the screen.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
ChatON  
.
• Search by Samsung Account ID  
a known samsung account ID.  
: to search by using  
2. Read the on-screen notification about data charges  
and tap OK  
.
3. Enter the information and tap  
. Once the recipient  
3. Select Terms and conditions and Privacy policy and read  
the on-screen information. Tap Accept to continue.  
4. Select a country code, enter your current phone  
is matched, their entry appears in the Results area.  
4. Tap Add buddy) and confirm your new buddy  
(
appears in the Buddies tab.  
number to register with the service, and tap Done  
.
5. Choose to receive the verification code via either SMS  
Note: For more information, press  
and tap General  
(text message) or Voice to your device.  
Help  
.
Note: If you opt to receive the verification code via SMS, this  
information is sent directly to your device. Once  
Using ChatON for Chatting  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
ChatON  
.
received, the Verification field is automatically filled in.  
2. Tap the Buddies tab and select a buddy to initiate your  
6. Enter your real name and tap  
OK.  
chat.  
3. Enter your message using the on-screen text entry  
method.  
Send  
4. Tap  
to send the message.  
119  
   
Deleting a single message bubble  
1. From the Home screen, tap ChatON  
Buddy’s Bubble  
.
2. Launch a chat session to reveal the message string.  
3. Touch and hold a message bubble, then select Delete  
.
Text Message  
Thread  
My Bubble  
To reply to a ChatON message:  
1. While the chat session is active, tap the Enter message  
field and then type your reply message.  
2. Compose your reply.  
Your texts are colored Blue and your buddy’s messages  
are white.  
Send  
3. Tap  
to deliver your reply.  
Messaging  
120  
 
Section 8: Changing Your Settings  
This section explains the settings used for customizing your  
device.  
Advanced Wi-Fi Settings  
The advanced Wi-Fi settings allow you to set up and manage  
Accessing Settings  
wireless access points.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
2. Tap Advanced  
The following options are available:  
Settings  
Wi-Fi.  
From any Home screen, tap  
Settings  
.
.
– or –  
From any Home screen, press  
The Settings screen displays.  
Settings.  
• Network notification: alerts you when a new WAP is available.  
• Keep Wi-Fi on during sleep: allows you to specify when to  
disconnect from Wi-Fi.  
Wi-Fi Settings  
This section describes the Wi-Fi settings. For information on  
• Check for Internet service: Checks if Wi-Fi internet service is  
available when connected to an AP (Access Point).  
• Auto connect: allows you to be automatically connected to an  
AT&T Wi-Fi Hotspot as soon as your phone detects it.  
• MAC address: view your device’s MAC address, required  
when connecting to some secured networks (not configurable).  
• IP address: view your device’s IP address.  
Activating Wi-Fi  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Settings  
Wi-Fi.  
2. Tap the ON/OFF slider, located to the right of the Wi-Fi  
field, to turn Wi-Fi ON  
.
ON  
3. Tap Scan to scan for available Wi-Fi networks. For more  
121  
               
• Rename device: Your device’s default name displays on  
screen. Tap to change the device name. Available when  
Bluetooth is turned On.  
Bluetooth settings  
In this menu you can activate Bluetooth, view or assign a  
device name, activate your phone so other Bluetooth devices  
can discover it, or scan for other, available Bluetooth devices  
with which to pair.  
• Visible time-out: Use this setting to control when to  
automatically turn off the Discoverable option: 2 minutes, 5  
minutes, 1 hour, or Never timeout.  
Activating Bluetooth  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Settings  
.
• Received files: Show the list of files received by using  
Bluetooth.  
2. Tap the ON/OFF slider, located to the right of the  
Bluetooth field, to turn Bluetooth ON  
The Bluetooth icon is displayed.  
Additional Bluetooth Settings  
When Bluetooth is on, additional settings are available.  
1. From the Home screen, tap Settings  
Bluetooth  
.
4. Tap the checkbox next to SAMSUNG-SGH-I317 if you do  
not want your phone visible to other Bluetooth devices.  
ON  
Data Usage  
From this screen you can view your Mobile data usage and  
turn your Mobile data capability On or Off.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
usage  
Settings  
Data  
.
.
2. Tap Scan to scan for nearby discoverable devices. After  
searching, tap a device to pair with it. For more  
2. Tap Mobile data to create a checkmark and turn Mobile  
data usage on.  
3. Tap Set mobile data limit to create a checkmark and  
allow a data limit to be set.  
3. Press  
and select a Bluetooth setting to configure:  
4. Touch and drag the red limit bar to the GB limit that you  
desire.  
Changing Your Settings  
122  
   
5. Tap the Data usage cycle drop-down menu and select a  
date.  
Options display for Airplane mode, Mobile networks,  
Tethering and portable hotspots, VPN, NFC, S Beam,  
Nearby devices, AllShare Cast, and Kies via Wi-Fi.  
The data usage displays as a visual (chart) and also  
displays a list of each application with a breakdown of  
how much data was used per application.  
Airplane mode  
Airplane mode allows you to use many of your phone’s  
features, such as Camera, Games, and more, when you are  
in an airplane or in any other area where making or receiving  
calls or data is prohibited.  
Note: Data is measured by your device. Your service provider  
may account for data usage differently.  
6. Press  
to display additional options. Tap to activate.  
Important! When your phone is in Airplane Mode, it cannot  
send or receive any calls or access online  
information or applications.  
• Data roaming: enables Data roaming on your device.  
• Restrict background data: restricts some apps and services  
from working unless you are connected to a Wi-Fi network.  
• Auto-sync data: allows your accounts to automatically sync  
• Show Wi-Fi usage: displays a Wi-Fi tab that shows Wi-Fi  
usage.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Settings.  
2. Tap More settings located under the Connectivity  
heading.  
3. Tap Airplane mode. A check mark displayed next to the  
feature indicates Airplane mode is active.  
• Mobile hotspots: displays available mobile hotspots.  
More Settings  
This option displays additional Connectivity information.  
4. At the Airplane mode prompt, tap OK  
.
The Airplane mode icon  
your screen.  
is displayed at the top of  
From the Home screen, tap  
settings  
Settings  
More  
.
123  
   
1. From the Home screen, tap  
settings Mobile networks  
2. Tap Access Point Names  
Settings  
More  
Mobile networks  
Before you use applications such as Google Maps and find  
your location or search for places of interest, you must  
enable the Mobile networks options.  
.
.
A list of the Access Point names display. The active  
access point displays a green, filled circle to the right  
of the name.  
Mobile data  
To enable data access over the mobile network, this option  
must be selected. It is set on by default.  
Network Operators  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
settings Mobile networks  
Settings  
More  
Using this feature you can view the current network  
connection. You can also scan and select a network operator  
manually, or set the network selection to Automatic.  
.
2. Tap Mobile data to create a checkmark and activate the  
feature.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
settings Mobile networks  
2. Tap Network operators  
Settings  
More  
Data Roaming  
.
Data roaming allows you to connect to your service  
provider’s partner networks and access data services when  
you are out of your service providers area of coverage.  
.
The current network connection displays at the bottom  
of the list.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
settings Mobile networks  
Settings  
More  
.
Important! You must deactivate data service prior to searching  
for an available network.  
2. Tap Data roaming to create a checkmark and activate  
the feature.  
Access Point Names  
Note: Connecting to 2G networks slows the data transfer  
To use Wi-Fi you need access to a wireless access point  
(hotspot).  
speed and time.  
Changing Your Settings  
124  
Default setup options  
3. Tap USB tethering to add a checkmark and activate the  
feature. The USB tethering icon  
top of your screen.  
is displayed at the  
Your phone default is set to Automatic (to automatically  
search for an available network. You can set this option to  
Manual to select a network each time you connect.  
Mobile Hotspot  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
settings Mobile networks  
2. Tap Network operators  
3. Tap Default setup  
4. Tap Manual to locate and connect to a network  
Settings  
More  
Mobile Hotspot  
.
.
.
– or –  
.
From the Home screen, tap  
Settings  
More  
settings  
Hotspot  
2. Turn Mobile Hotspot on by tapping the slider so that it  
Tethering and portable hotspots  
Mobile  
manually, or tap Automatic to allow the device to  
automatically select a network.  
.
Tethering & portable hotspot  
changes to the ON position  
The Mobile Hotspot icon  
your screen.  
.
ON  
This option allows you to share your phones’s mobile data  
connection via USB or as a portable Wi-Fi hotspot.  
USB tethering  
is displayed at the top of  
3. Tap Configure at the bottom of the screen.  
4. Enter or edit the Network SSID, Hide my device,  
Security setting, and Password.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Mobile Hotspot  
.
– or –  
5. Tap Show password and Show advanced options to see  
them displayed.  
From the Home screen, tap  
Settings  
More  
settings  
Tethering and portable hotspot.  
6. Tap Save  
.
2. Connect your phone to your PC using a USB cable.  
7. Press  
for the following options:  
125  
     
• Timeout settings: allows you to set the time your device will be  
available as a portable Wi-Fi hotspot.  
VPN settings  
The VPN settings menu allows you to set up and manage  
• Help: provides additional information.  
Virtual Private Networks (VPNs).  
Connecting to Portable Wi-Fi hotspot from other  
devices  
1. Activate Wi-Fi on the device that wants to connect to  
Important! Before you can use a VPN you must establish and  
configure one.  
your phone.  
Adding a Basic VPN  
2. Find [Galaxy_Note_II_xxxx] in the Wi-Fi network list and  
connect to it. XXXX are four randomly generated digits  
that will appear when you set up a Portable Wi-Fi  
hotspot on your device.  
Before you add a VPN you must determine which VPN  
protocol to use: PPTP (Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol),  
L2TP (Layer 2 Tunneling Protocol), L2TP/IPSec PSK (Pre-  
shared key based L2TP/IPSec), or L2TP/IPSec CRT  
(Certificate based L2TP/IPSec).  
1. Before using VPN, you must first set up a screen unlock  
The connected device can now use internet through  
your Portable Wi-Fi hotspot.  
Note: Activating Wi-Fi and connecting to your phone will be  
different depending on the type of the other device.  
2. From the Home screen, tap  
settings VPN  
3. Tap Basic VPN  
4. Tap Add VPN network  
5. Enter a name for the VPN network in the Name field.  
Settings  
More  
.
Help  
.
From the Tethering and portable hotspot menu, tap Help  
for additional information  
.
Changing Your Settings  
126  
6. Select a VPN type from the Type drop-down menu. The  
3. Tap Advanced IPsec VPN  
4. Tap Add VPN connection  
5. Enter a password and tap OK  
.
options are:  
.
PPTP (Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol)  
L2TP/IPSec PSK (Layer 2 Tunneling Protocol / Internet Protocol  
Security Pre-Shared Key)  
.
6. Enter a name for the VPN connection in the VPN  
connection name field.  
L2TP/IPSec RSA  
7. Select a IPsec type from the drop-down menu.  
8. Enter any other required information.  
9. Tap the Show advanced options check box to display  
additional VPN options.  
IPSec Xauth PSK  
IPSec Xauth RSA  
IPSec Hybrid RSA  
7. Enter the Server address and any other required fields  
that are dependent upon the Type you entered  
previously.  
10. Tap Save to save your VPN settings.  
NFC  
NFC (Near Field Communication) allows data exchange when  
you touch your device with another compatible device. This  
is used for applications such as S Beam.  
8. Tap the Show advanced options check box to display  
additional VPN options.  
9. Tap Save to save your VPN settings.  
To activate NFC, follow these steps:  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
settings NFC  
2. Tap the ON/OFF slider, located to the right of the NFC  
field, to turn NFC ON  
Settings  
More  
Adding an IPsec VPN  
1. Before using VPN, you must first set up a screen unlock  
.
.
ON  
2. From the Home screen, tap  
settings VPN  
Settings  
More  
.
127  
 
5. Verify  
(Nearby devices) appears at the top of the  
S Beam  
screen.  
When S Beam is activated, you can beam files to another  
NFC-capable device by holding the devices close together.  
You can beam images and videos from your Gallery, music  
files from your Music Player, and more.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
settings S Beam  
2. Tap the OFF / ON icon to turn S Beam on  
6. At the Nearby devices prompt, tap OK  
7. Tap Shared contents, then check the media you would  
like to share. Tap OK  
8. Tap Device name, then use the on-screen keyboard to  
change the name shown to others. Tap Save  
.
.
Settings  
More  
.
.
.
ON  
9. Tap Allowed devices list, then select the connected  
devices you would like to allow.  
3. Touch the back of your device with another NFC-  
capable device and the content is transferred.  
10. Tap Not-allowed devices list, then select the connected  
devices you would like to not allow.  
Nearby devices  
This option allows you to share your media files with nearby  
devices using DLNA and connected to the same Wi-Fi.  
1. Connect to a Wi-Fi network. For more information, refer  
11. Tap Download to, then select the destination of any  
downloaded (shared) content. Choose from Device or  
SD card.  
12. Tap Upload from other devices, then select the actions  
you’ll take when you upload content from other  
devices. Choose from either Always accept, Always  
ask, or Always reject.  
2. From the Home screen, tap  
settings Nearby devices  
Settings  
More  
.
3. Verify Wi-Fi Direct is enabled and you are paired with  
the device you wish to detect and share content with.  
4. Tap the File sharing checkbox to create a checkmark  
and activate File sharing.  
Changing Your Settings  
128  
 
AllShare Cast  
With AllShare Cast, you can wirelessly share your phone's  
screen with Wi-Fi-enabled TV using the AllShare Cast Hub  
accessory.  
Note: This feature allows a connection between your phone  
and the optional AllShare Cast Hub, via a shared Wi-Fi  
connection. The AllShare Cast Hub then allows the  
communicating TV to mirror what is being shown on the  
phone's display.  
1. Confirm you have already logged in to your Samsung  
account. There should be no  
Notifications area of the screen.  
2. From the Home screen, tap  
icon in the  
Settings  
Kies via Wi-Fi  
More  
Kies via Wi-Fi allows you to sync your PC wirelessly with your  
device provided they are both on the same Wi-Fi network.  
You can view and share videos, photos, music, ringtones,  
and more.  
settings  
AllShare Cast.  
3. Tap the OFF / ON icon to turn AllShare Cast on  
.
ON  
1. From your PC, download the Samsung Kies application  
if you don’t already have it. You can find it at  
4. Make sure you and the device you want to share with  
are connected to the same Wi-Fi network. For more  
.
2. From your PC, launch the Samsung Kies application.  
3. From your PC, connect to a Wi-Fi network.  
Your phone automatically scans for other compatible  
devices.  
4. From the Home screen, tap  
settings Kies via Wi-Fi  
Settings  
More  
.
5. Follow the on-screen instructions to connect with the  
5. From your device, connect to the same Wi-Fi network  
that your PC is connected to if you have not already  
TV.  
129  
   
Home screen mode  
Home screen mode allows you to set your display to the  
conventional layout of Basic mode or provide an easier user  
experience for the first-time smartphone users using Easy  
Blocking Mode  
When Blocking mode is enabled, notifications for selected  
features will be disabled. You will only receive notifications of  
incoming calls from people on your allowed list.  
mode  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
screen mode  
.
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Blocking mode  
2. In a single motion touch and slide the Blocking mode  
slider to the right to turn it on  
Settings  
Settings  
Home  
.
.
2. Tap the pull-down dropbox and select one of the  
.
ON  
following options:  
• Basic mode: provides conventional layout for the apps and  
widgets on your home screens.  
Confirm that the Blocking mode active icon  
appears in the Status bar.  
3. Place a green checkmark adjacent to those features  
you would like to enable. Choose from: Disable  
incoming calls, Disable notifications, Disable alarm and  
timer, Disable LED indicator.  
• Easy mode: provides easier user experience for first-time  
smartphone users on the home screens.  
3. Tap Apply  
.
4. Configure a timeframe for these features to be active.  
Remove the checkmark from the Always field to  
configure the From and To time fields.  
Changing Your Settings  
130  
       
5. Tap Allowed contacts to assign those contacts that are  
exempted from these rules. Choose from None, All  
contacts, Favorites, or Custom. Allowed contacts will  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Vibration intensity  
Settings  
Sound  
.
2. Touch and drag the slider to adjust the Vibration  
intensity for Incoming call, Notification, and Haptic  
feedback.  
then appear in the Allowed contact list  
.
Sound Settings  
From this menu you can control the sounds on the phone.  
Device ringtone  
This option allows you to set the ringtone.  
From the Home screen, tap Settings Sound.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
2. Tap Device ringtone  
Settings  
Sound.  
The following options display:  
.
Volume  
3. Tap a ringtone and tap OK  
.
The Volume option allows you to change the volume for all  
phone sounds in one easy location.  
Device vibration  
This option allows you to set your phone to vibrate and ring.  
1. From the Home screen, tap Settings Sound  
2. Tap Device vibration  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Volume  
Settings  
Sound  
.
.
.
2. Touch and drag the slider to adjust the sound volume  
3. Select a vibration pattern and tap OK  
.
for Media, Ringtone, Notifications, and System.  
Default notifications  
3. Tap OK  
.
This option allows you to set the ringtone that will sound for  
notifications and alarms.  
Vibration intensity  
Vibration intensity allows you to select how intense the  
vibration is for different options.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
2. Tap Default notifications  
Settings  
Sound  
.
.
131  
     
3. Tap a ringtone and tap OK  
.
Display Settings  
In this menu, you can change various settings for the display.  
Sound and vibration  
This option allows you to enable all sounds and vibrations.  
From the Home screen, tap  
The following options display:  
Settings  
Display.  
1. From the Home screen, tap Settings Sound.  
2. Tap Sound and vibration to create a checkmark and  
• Wallpaper: allows you to set the Wallpaper for your Home  
screen, Lock screen, or both. For more information, refer to  
enable the feature.  
System Tone Settings  
The System tone settings are used when you use the dialing  
pad, make a screen selection, lock your screen, or tap the  
screen.  
• LED indicator: allows you to turn on your LED lights for  
charging, low battery, incoming notifications, and voice  
recording. The light will turn on by default unless you turn them  
off.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Settings  
Sound.  
2. Tap any of the following options to create a checkmark  
and activate the feature:  
• Page buddy: allows context related pages to be created on the  
Home screen. You can select S Pen page, Earphones page,  
Docking page, and Roaming page. Tap Page buddy help for  
more information. Touch and slide the Page buddy slider to the  
• Keytones: makes a sound when you tap a key on the  
keyboard.  
Touch sounds: makes a sound when you touch the screen.  
• Screen lock sound: makes a sound when your screen is  
locked or unlocked.  
right to turn it on  
.
ON  
• Screen mode: allows you to select from several different color  
modes.  
• Haptic feedback: makes a vibration when you tap soft keys  
and on certain UI interactions.  
• Brightness: configures the LCD Brightness levels. Tap  
Automatic brightness to allow the phone to self-adjust or drag  
the slider and tap OK.  
Changing Your Settings  
132  
   
• Auto-rotate screen: allows you to switch the display  
orientation automatically when you rotate the phone.  
• Screen timeout: adjusts the delay time before the screen  
automatically turns off. Selections are: 15 seconds, 30  
seconds, 1 minute, 3 minutes, 5 minutes, and 10 minutes.  
• Smart rotation: disables the auto screen rotation by checking  
the orientation of your face and the device.  
Storage  
From this menu you can view the memory allocation for the  
memory card and USB as well as mount or unmount the SD  
card.  
For more information about mounting or unmounting the SD  
To view the memory allocation for your external SD card:  
• Smart stay: disables the screen timeout if your phone detects  
that your face is watching the screen.  
From the Home screen, tap  
Settings ➔  
Storage.The available memory displays under the Total  
space and Available space headings for both Device  
memory and SD card.  
• Font style: allows you to set the font style that your phone will  
use. You can also tap Get fonts online to choose from a wider  
selection.  
SD card  
Tap Unmount SD card to unmount your SD card so that  
• Font size: allows you to select which size of font is displayed.  
Touch key light duration: allows you to adjust the delay before  
the Touch key light automatically turns off.  
you can safely remove it, then tap OK  
– or –  
.
• Display battery percentage: allows you to see the battery  
charge percentage next to the battery charge icon at the top of  
the display.  
1. Tap Format SD card to re-format your SD card. This will  
delete all data on your SD card including music, videos,  
and photos.  
• Auto adjust screen tone: allows you to save power because  
the phone analyzes the displayed screen image and adjusts the  
LCD brightness.  
2. Tap Format SD card again.  
3. Tap Delete all to continue or press  
to cancel.  
133  
 
4. Tap Learn about power saving to learn about various  
Note: The Format SD card option is only available when your  
ways to conserve battery power.  
SD card is mounted.  
Battery  
See how much battery power is used for device activities.  
Power Saving  
Power Saving Mode allows you to manage your phone to  
conserve power.  
1. From a Home screen, tap  
Settings Battery.  
The battery level displays in percentage. The amount  
of time the battery was used also displays. Battery  
usage displays in percentages per application.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
saving  
2. Tap the OFF / ON icon next to Power saving to turn  
Power saving mode on  
Settings  
Power  
.
2. Tap Screen  
Media server  
to view how it is affecting battery use.  
,
Cell standby  
,
Android System, Android OS,  
.
ON  
,
Device idle, or any other listed application  
3. Tap the following options to create a checkmark and  
conserve power:  
Note: Other applications may be running that affect battery  
• CPU power saving: allows you to limit the maximum  
performance of the CPU.  
use.  
• Screen power saving: allows you to lower the screen power  
level.  
Application Manager  
You can download and install applications from Play Store or  
create applications using the Android SDK and install them  
on your device. Use Application manager settings to manage  
applications.  
• Background color: allows you to change the background color  
on email and internet to save power.  
Turn off haptic feedback: allows you to turn off vibration when  
you tap or touch the screen.  
Changing Your Settings  
134  
     
3. To switch the order of the lists displayed in the  
Downloaded tabs, press Sort by size or Sort by  
name  
4. To reset your application preferences, press  
Reset app preferences  
Warning! Because this device can be configured with system  
software not provided by or supported by Google or  
any other company, end-users operate these devices  
at their own risk.  
.
.
Memory Usage  
See how memory is being used by Downloaded or Running  
applications.  
Note: This will reset the preferences for disabled apps,  
disabled app notifications, default applications for  
actions, and background data restrictions for apps. You  
will not lose any app data.  
1. From a Home screen, tap  
Application manager  
2. Tap Downloaded Running, or All to display memory  
Settings ➔  
.
,
5. Tap an application to view and update information  
about the application, including memory usage, default  
settings, and permissions.  
usage for that category of applications.  
The graph at the bottom of the Downloaded tab shows  
used and free device memory. The graph at the bottom  
of the Running tab shows used and free RAM.  
Running Services  
View and control services running on your device.  
Downloaded  
1. From a Home screen, tap  
Application manager  
Settings ➔  
.
Displays apps you have downloaded onto your device.  
1. From a Home screen, tap Settings ➔  
Application manager  
2. Tap the Running tab. All the applications that are  
.
currently running on the device display.  
2. Tap the Downloaded tab to view a list of all the  
downloaded applications on your device.  
135  
   
3. Tap Show cached processes to display all the cached  
processes that are running. Tap Show services in use to  
switch back.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
settings Location services  
Settings  
More  
.
2. Tap any of the following options to create a checkmark  
and activate the service:  
4. Tap one of the applications to view application  
information.  
• Use wireless networks: allows applications to use data from  
mobile networks and Wi-Fi to help determine your location.  
• Use GPS satellites: allows applications to use GPS to pinpoint  
your location.  
The following options display:  
• Stop: Stops the application from running on the device. This is  
usually done prior to uninstalling the application.  
• Location and Google search: allows Google to use your  
location data for improved search results and other services.  
Warning! Not all services can be stopped. Stopping services  
may have undesirable consequences on the  
application or Android System.  
Lock Screen Settings  
Choose settings for unlocking your screen. For more  
information about using the lock and unlock features, see  
• Report: Report failure and other application information.  
Note: Options vary by application.  
Screen Lock  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Settings  
Lock  
Location Services  
The Location services settings allow you to set up how the  
phone will determine your location and the sensor settings  
for your phone.  
screen  
.
2. Tap Screen lock for these options:  
• Swipe: Swipe the screen to unlock it.  
• Motion: While tapping and holding the screen, tilt the device  
forward to unlock.  
Changing Your Settings  
136  
       
• Face unlock: Look at your phone to unlock it.  
• Face and voice: Look at your phone and speak to unlock.  
• Pattern: A screen unlock pattern is a touch gesture you create  
and use to unlock your device. Follow the prompts to create or  
change your screen unlock pattern.  
• Information ticker sets the news and stock information ticker  
to appear across the bottom of the Lock screen. Touch and  
slide the slider to the right to turn it on  
.
ON  
• Clock allows you to display the digital clock while the Lock  
screen is active. Enabled by default.  
• Dual clock displays a set of dual digital clock on the Lock  
screen while you are traveling. Tap the entry to set your home  
city. This time zone then becomes the time used by one of  
these on-screen clocks. Touch and slide the slider to the right  
• PIN: Select a PIN to use for unlocking the screen.  
• Password: Create a password for unlocking the screen.  
• None: No pattern, PIN, or password is required. The screen will  
never lock.  
to turn it on  
• Weather displays the current area weather on the Lock screen.  
Touch and slide the slider to the right to turn it on  
.
ON  
Lock screen options  
Activate or deactivates various Unlock screen functions.  
.
ON  
Tap and set both the temperature units (F or C) and a refresh  
time.  
Note: The Lock screen options are only available when the  
Screen lock option is set to Swipe or Motion  
.
• Ripple effect activates/deactivates the ripple effect on the lock  
screen when you tap it.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
screen Lock screen options  
2. The following options are available:  
Settings  
Lock  
.
• Ink effect activates/deactivates the ink effect on the lock  
screen when you tap it. the Ripple effect must be activated first.  
• Help text shows help information on the Lock screen.  
• Shortcuts sets shortcuts to appear at the bottom of the Lock  
screen. Touch and slide the slider to the right to turn it on  
.
ON  
137  
                     
• Camera quick access provides you with quick access to the  
camera function from the Lock screen. When this option has  
been activated, touch and hold the lock screen while rotating  
the device to the landscape position then release the screen.  
3. From the lock screen, hold down the S Pen button and  
double tap the screen to bring up the Popup Note  
feature.  
Owner information  
This option allows you to show owner information on the lock  
screen. You can also enter text to display on the lock screen.  
Touch and slide the slider to the right to turn it on  
.
ON  
• Wake up in lock screen requires that you say a command to  
wake-up S Voice.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
screen Owner information  
Settings  
Lock  
• Set wake-up command designates your S Voice wake-up  
commands. Tap Wake-up S Voice and follow the on-screen  
prompts to create a new verbal command.  
.
2. Tap the Show owner info on lock screen checkbox to  
create a checkmark if you want your owner information  
displayed.  
Note: These options vary depending on the selected Lock  
3. Enter text that you would like displayed on your  
settings.  
lockscreen and tap OK  
.
Security  
Popup Note on lock screen  
This option allows the Popup Note feature to be active on  
your lock screen.  
The Security settings allow you to determine the security  
level for your phone.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
screen  
Settings  
Lock  
Encryption  
.
To require a numeric PIN or password to decrypt your phone  
each time you power it on or encrypt the data on your SD  
card each time it is connected:  
2. Tap Popup Note on lock screen to create a checkmark  
and activate the feature.  
Changing Your Settings  
138  
         
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Security  
Settings  
When enabled, your phone will ask for a PIN number each  
time you use the phone. Using this option you can also  
change your SIM PIN number.  
.
2. Tap Encrypt device. For more information, read the  
displayed help screen.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Security  
2. Tap Set up SIM card lock  
3. Tap Lock SIM card, enter your SIM PIN code, then tap  
OK  
Settings  
.
3. Tap Encrypt external SD card to enable the encryption  
on SD card data that requires a password be entered  
each time the microSD card is connected.  
.
.
Tip: Make sure your battery is charged more than 80 percent.  
Note: You must activate Lock SIM card before you can change  
Encryption may take an hour or more.  
your SIM PIN code.  
Set up/change password  
Use this option to set up your password when one is first  
required or change your current password.  
4. Tap Change SIM PIN  
5. Enter your old SIM PIN code and tap OK  
6. Enter your new SIM PIN code and tap OK  
7. Re-type your new SIM PIN code and tap OK.  
.
.
.
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Set up/change password  
2. Enter a new password and tap Confirm  
Settings  
Security  
.
.
Make passwords visible  
When enabled, password characters display briefly as you  
3. Enter the new password again and tap Confirm  
.
touch them while entering passwords.  
Set up SIM card lock  
Prevent another user from using your SIM card to make  
unauthorized calls or from accessing information stored on  
your SIM card by protecting the information using a PIN code.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Security  
Settings  
.
139  
2. Tap Make passwords visible to create a checkmark and  
3. Select a device administrator and follow the prompts. If  
no device administrators are listed, you can download  
them from the Play Store.  
enable or disable the display of password characters.  
Device Administrators  
Unknown sources  
This feature allows you to download and install non-Market  
applications.  
The Device Administration feature allows you to select one or  
more administration applications that control your device for  
security purposes (for example, if your phone is lost of  
stolen). These applications enforce remote or local device  
security policies.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Security  
2. Tap Unknown sources  
Settings  
.
Some of the features a device administration application  
might control are:  
.
A check mark is displayed to indicate it is active.  
Setting the number of failed password attempts before the  
device is restored to factory settings.  
Warning! Enabling this option causes your phone and personal  
data to be more vulnerable to attack by applications  
from unknown sources.  
Automatically locking the device.  
Restoring factory settings on the device.  
Note: If a device uses multiple enabled administration  
Trusted Credentials  
If a certificate authority (CA) certificate gets compromised or  
for some other reason you do not trust it, you can disable or  
remove it.  
applications, the strictest policy is enforced.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Security  
2. Tap Device administrators  
Settings  
.
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Security  
2. Tap Trusted credentials  
Settings  
.
.
.
Changing Your Settings  
140  
   
The trusted credentials screen has two tabs:  
Install from device storage  
Install encrypted certificates from an installed memory card.  
• System: Displays CA certificates that are permanently installed  
in the ROM of your device.  
Note: You must have installed a memory card containing  
• User: Displays any CA certificates that you installed, for  
example, in the process of installing a client certificate.  
3. Tap a CA certificate to examine its details.  
A scrolling screen displays the details.  
encrypted certificates to use this feature.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Security  
Settings  
.
2. Tap Install from device storage, then choose a  
4. Scroll to the bottom of the details screen and tap  
Disable to disable a System certificate or Remove to  
remove a User certificate.  
certificate and follow the prompts to install.  
Clear credentials  
Clear stored credentials.  
Caution! When you disable a system CA certificate, the Disable  
button changes to Enable, so you can enable the  
certificate again, if necessary. When you remove a  
user-installed CA certificate, it is permanently  
deleted and must be re-installed, if needed.  
Note: This setting only appears if you have installed encrypted  
certificates.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Security  
2. Tap Clear credentials to remove all certificates.  
Settings  
.
5. Tap OK to return to the certificate list.  
When enabled, a check mark appears in the check box.  
141  
One-handed operation  
Language and input  
This menu allows you to configure the language in which to  
display the menus. You can also set onscreen keyboard  
options.  
The one-handed operation settings help you to use your  
phone keypads easily with only one hand.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
handed operation  
2. The following options are available:  
Settings  
One-  
.
Language  
You can change the language used by your device by  
• Keypad & in-call buttons: allows you to adjust the position of  
the dialing keypad and in-call buttons to the left or the right to  
make it easier to use with one hand.  
following these steps:  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Language and input Language  
2. Tap a language from the list.  
Keyboards and Input Methods  
Settings  
.
• Samsung keyboard: allows you to adjust the position of the  
Samsung keyboard to the left or the right to make it easier to  
use with one hand.  
You can change the keyboard used by your device by  
• Calculator: allows you to adjust the position of the calculator  
keypad to the left or the right to make it easier to use with one  
hand.  
following these steps:  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Language and input  
2. Tap Default and select a keyboard.  
Select Samsung keyboard or Swype.  
3. Tap Set up input methods  
4. Tap the icon next to the input method that you  
would like to configure the settings for.  
Settings  
.
• Unlock pattern: allows you to adjust the scale of the unlock  
pattern for use with one hand.  
• Learn about on-handed operation: provides more information  
about using one-handed operation.  
.
Changing Your Settings  
142  
           
5. Based on your selection of input method, the  
appropriate settings will appear and are explained  
below.  
2. Tap the  
icon next to Samsung keyboard.  
• Portrait keypad types allows you to choose a keypad  
configuration (Qwerty [default] or 3x4 Keyboard).  
• Input languages sets the input language. Tap a language from  
the available list. The keyboard is updated to the selected  
language.  
Google voice typing settings  
From this menu you can set Samsung keyboard options.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Language and input  
2. Tap the icon next to Google voice typing  
3. The following options are available:  
Settings  
• Predictive text enables predictive text entry mode. This must  
be enabled to gain access to the advanced settings. Touch and  
hold to access the advanced settings. Touch and slide the slider  
.
.
to the right to turn it on  
.
ON  
• Choose input languages: tap on a language that you want to  
input. Select Automatic to use the local language or select a  
language from the list.  
• Continuous input allows you to type words by swiping  
between on-screen keys.  
• Pen detection displays the handwriting pad whenever the pen  
is detected.  
• Block offensive words tap to create a checkmark and enable  
the blocking of recognized offensive words from the results of  
your voice-input Google typing.  
:
• One-handed operation allows youto set your keyboard for use  
with one hand.  
• Download offline speech recognition: Enables voice input  
while offline.  
• Handwriting enables the device to recognize on-screen  
handwriting and convert it to text.  
Samsung Keyboard settings  
From this menu you can set Samsung keyboard options.  
• Advanced displays the following advanced options:  
Auto capitalization automatically capitalizes the first letter of  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Language and input  
Settings  
the first word in each sentence (standard English style).  
.
143  
       
Auto-punctuate automatically inserts a full stop in a sentence  
by tapping the space bar twice when using the on-screen  
QWERTY keyboard.  
4. Tap Predictive text.  
5. The following options are available:  
• Personalized data: allows you to use personal language that  
you have added to make your prediction results better.  
• Learn from Facebook: allows you to login to your Facebook  
account so your phone can learn your Facebook style.  
• Learn from Gmail : allows you to login to your Gmail account  
so your phone can learn your Gmail style.  
Character preview provides an automatic preview of the  
current character selection within the text string. This is helpful  
when multiple characters are available within one key.  
Key-tap vibration enables vibration feedback when you tap an  
on-screen key.  
Key-tap sound enables auditory feedback when you tap an  
on-screen key.  
• Learn from Twitter : allows you to login to your Twitter account  
so your phone can learn your Twitter style.  
Tutorial launches a brief on-screen tutorial covering the main  
concepts related to the Samsung keyboard.  
• Reset settings resets the keyboard settings back to their  
original configuration.  
• Clear remote data: deletes anonymous data that is stored on  
the personalization server.  
• Clear personalized data: removes all personalized data that  
you have entered.  
• privacy policy: click the link to read the privacy policy. Follow  
the on-screen instructions.  
Predictive Text Settings  
From this menu you can set Predictive Text settings.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Language and input  
2. Tap the icon next to Samsung keyboard  
3. Tap the ON/OFF slider, located to the right of the  
Predictive text field, to turn it ON  
Settings  
Swype Keypad Settings  
To configure Swype settings:  
.
.
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Language and input  
2. Tap the icon next to Swype  
Changing Your Settings  
Settings  
.
.
ON  
.
144  
 
3. Tap How to Swype to view an on-screen manual for  
Swype.  
Note: If incorrect words are being entered as you type,  
disabled this feature.  
4. Tap Preferences to alter these settings:  
• Vibrate on keypress: activates a vibration sensation as you  
enter text using the keypad.  
• Reset Swype’s dictionary: once enabled, deletes any words  
you have added to Swype’s dictionary.  
• Sound on keypresses: turns on sounds generated by the  
Swype application.  
• Version: displays the software version information.  
5. Tap Language Options to activate and select the current  
text input language. Default language is US English.  
6. Tap Swype Connect to activate social media  
personalization and configure data settings.  
• Facebook: allows you to log into your current Facebook  
account from where contact names are added to your Swpe’s  
personal dictionary for later use when you enter names into text  
fields. Helps recognize familiar names.  
• Show helpful tips: turns on a flashing indicator for quick help.  
• Auto-spacing: automatically inserts a space between words.  
When you finish a word, just lift your finger or stylus and start  
the next word.  
• Auto-capitalization: automatically capitalizes the first letter of  
a sentence.  
• Show complete trace: once enabled, sets wether or not to  
display the complete Swype path.  
Twitter: allows you to sing into your existing Twitter account  
from where names and words are added to your personal  
dictionary. Helps recognize familiar names and words.  
• Gmail: allows you to sign in to your existing Gmail account from  
where existing contact information is added to your personal  
dictionary. Helps recognize familiar names.  
• Pop-up on keypress: once enabled, displays a character  
above an on-screen key while typing.  
• Next word prediction: once enabled, predicts the next word in  
your text string based on your current text entries.  
145  
         
• Contribute data usage: when enabled, allows the Nuance®  
application to collect usage data for better word predictions.  
• Cellular data: when enabled, activates cellular data usage by  
the Swype application so it can receive program updates,  
language downloads, and other related features via your  
existing data connection.  
• Block offensive words: Enable or disable blocking of  
recognized offensive words from the results of your voice-input  
Google searches.  
• Hotword detection: Enable to being able to launch voice  
search by saying the word “Google”.  
• Download offline speech recognition: Enables voice input  
while offline.  
7. Tap Personal dictionary to access and manage your  
personal dictionary.  
3. Tap Text-to-speech output and select Google Text-to-  
8. Tap Updates to update the application if new software  
is available.  
speech Engine or Samsung TTS  
4. Tap next to the preferred TTS engine configure the  
following settings:  
.
Speech Settings  
This menu allows you to set the speech settings for Voice  
input.  
• Language: allows you to set the language for spoken text.  
• Settings for Google Text-to-speech: allows you to view Open  
Source Licenses.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Language and input  
2. Tap Voice search to configure the following:  
Settings  
.
• Settings for Samsung TTS: allows you to view Open Source  
Licenses.  
• Language: Choose a language for your voice input.  
• Speech output: Sets whether you will use speech output  
always or only when using hands-free.  
• Install voice data: allows you to install voice data for speech  
synthesis.  
5. Scroll down to the General section to access the  
following options:  
• Speech rate: Set the speed at which the text is spoken.  
Changing Your Settings  
146  
         
• Listen to an example: Play a sample of speech synthesis  
(available if voice data is installed).  
2. Tap Back up my data to enable or disable back up of  
application data, WI-Fi passwords, and other settings  
to the Google server.  
6. Tap the ON/OFF icon  
next to Driving mode to  
ON  
turn it on and enable incoming calls and notifications to  
be read out automatically.  
Backup Account  
If you have enabled the Back up my data option, then the  
Backup account option is available.  
Pointer speed  
This option sets your Pointer speed.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
and reset  
Settings  
Back up  
.
Settings  
2. Tap Backup account and tap your Google Gmail account  
or tap Add account to set your Google Gmail account to  
be backed up to the Google server.  
Language and input  
.
2. Tap Pointer speed then drag the slider to the right to go  
faster or to the left to go slower.  
Automatic Restore  
3. Tap OK to save your setting.  
By setting this option, when you reinstall an application, all of  
your backed up settings and data will be restored.  
Back up and reset  
The Back up and reset settings allow you to back up your  
data, back up accounts, automatically restore your phone,  
and reset your phone settings to the factory settings.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
and reset  
Settings  
Back up  
.
2. Tap Automatic restore to enable or disable automatic  
Back Up My Data  
By setting this option, the Google server will back up all of  
restoration of settings from the Google server.  
your settings and data.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
and reset  
Settings  
Back up  
.
147  
     
Factory Data Reset  
From this menu you can reset your phone and sound settings  
Adding an Account  
1. From a Home screen, tap  
Settings Add  
to the factory default settings.  
account  
.
1. From the Home screen, tap  
and reset  
2. Tap Factory data reset  
Settings  
Back up  
2. Tap one of the account types.  
.
3. Use the keyboard and follow the prompts to enter your  
credentials and set up the account.  
.
The Factory data reset screen displays reset  
information.  
A green circle will appear next to the account type once  
you have created an account. Your email account will  
also be displayed in the Accounts section of the main  
Settings menu.  
3. Tap Reset device, then follow the prompts to perform  
the reset.  
Removing an Account  
Warning! Performing a Factory data reset will erase all data  
from your phone and internal SD card, including your  
Google account, system and application data and  
settings, and downloaded applications. It will not  
erase current system software, bundled  
Important! Removing an account also deletes all of its  
messages, contacts, and other data from the  
device.  
applications, and external SD card files such as  
music and photos.  
1. From a Home screen, tap  
Settings.  
2. Tap the account which is located in the Accounts  
section.  
Add Account  
This menu allows you to set up, manage, and synchronize  
accounts, including your Google and email accounts.  
3. Tap the account name.  
Changing Your Settings  
148  
     
4. Tap Remove account, then tap Remove account at the  
prompt to remove the account and delete all its  
messages, contacts, and other data.  
Caution! Excessive shaking or impact to the device may cause  
unintended results. To learn how to properly control  
motions, tap  
Settings  
Motion  
Learn  
Synchronizing Accounts  
about motions  
.
Select the items you want to synchronize on your account  
such as Books, Calendar, Contacts, and more.  
3. The following options are available. Tap an option to  
activate the feature. A checkmark is displayed.  
• Quick glance: Once enable, you can check key information at  
a glance by reaching towards your device.  
1. From a Home screen, tap  
Settings.  
2. Tap the account which is located in the Accounts  
section.  
• Direct call: Once enabled, the device will dial the currently  
displayed on-screen Contact entry as soon as you place the  
device to your ear.  
3. Tap the account name.  
4. Tap Sync now to synchronize your account or tap Sync  
all to synchronize all your accounts. Tap Cancel sync to  
stop the synchronization.  
• Smart alert: Once enabled, pickup the device to be alerted and  
notified of you have missed any calls or messages.  
• Double tap to top: Once enabled, double tap the top of the  
device to be taken to the top of the current on-screen list.  
• Tilt to zoom: Once enabled, you must be on a screen where  
content can be zoomed. In a single motion, touch and hold two  
points on the display then tilt the tilt the device back and forth to  
zoom in or out.  
5. Tap Settings to access your account settings.  
Motion  
The Motion settings allow you to set up various Motion  
activation services. For more information on using gestures,  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
2. Tap the ON/OFF icon  
Settings  
Motion.  
at the top of your  
ON  
screen to activate Motion.  
149  
     
• Pan to move icon: Once enabled, touch and hold a desired  
application shortcut icon or widget on the screen. Once it  
detaches, move the device left or right to migrate it to a new  
location.  
• Palm swipe to capture: Once enabled, you can capture any  
on-screen information swiping across the screen. In a single  
motion, press the side of your hand on the screen and swipe  
form left to right. The image is then copied to the clipboard.  
• Palm touch to mute/pause: Once enabled, you can pause any  
on-screen video or mute any current sound by simply covering  
the screen with your hand. Once you remove your hand from  
the screen, the device goes back to normal by either continuing  
to play the current video or unmuting the current sound.  
• Learn about hand motions: provides additional help on the  
hand motions such as Palm swipe to capture and Palm touch  
to mute/pause.  
• Pan to browse images Once enabled, touch and hold a  
:
desired on-screen image to pan around it. Move the device left  
or right to pan vertically or up and down to pan horizontally  
around the large on-screen image.  
• Shake to update: Once enabled, shake your device to rescan  
for Bluetooth devices, rescan for Wi-Fi devices, Refresh a Web  
page, etc.  
Turn over to mute/pause: Once enabled, mute incoming calls  
and any playing sounds by turning the device display down on  
a surface. This is the opposite of the Pickup to be Notified  
Gesture.  
S Pen Settings  
This menu allows you to customize settings for the S Pen.  
1. From the Home screen, tap Settings S Pen  
2. The following options are available:  
.
• Advanced settings: allows you to access additional settings  
for Quick glance, Gyroscope calibration, Tilt to zoom, Pan to  
move icon, and Pan to browse images.  
• Dominant hand: allows you to set your phone to Left handed  
or Right handed.  
• Learn about motions: provides additional help on using the  
different motions.  
• Pen attach/detach sound: allows you to select a sound to be  
played whenever the pen is attached or detached.  
Changing Your Settings  
150  
             
• Open Popup Note: automatically opens Popup Note whenever  
the pen is detached.  
3. Tap Audio output mode to use the external dock  
speakers when the phone is docked.  
• Battery saving: disables the pen detection feature while the  
pen is attached to save battery power.  
4. Tap Desk home screen display to display the desk home  
screen whenever the phone is docked.  
5. Tap Audio output to set your Audio output to Stereo or  
Surround.  
• S Pen keeper: sounds an alert and displays a pop-up when  
you walk with the device without attaching the pen.  
• Air view: When the S pen tip is near the screen for a while, the  
S pen hovering feature will be provided. Touch and slide the  
Date and time  
This menu allows you to change the current time and date  
displayed.  
slider to the right to turn it on  
.
ON  
• Sound and haptic feedback: allows you to hear sound and  
sense haptic feedback when using your S Pen  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
and time  
Settings  
Date  
.
• Quick command settings: allows you to create pen gestures  
to open selected apps or perform tasks.  
2. Tap Automatic date and time to allow the network to set  
the date and time.  
• S Pen help: provides additional information about S Pen.  
3. Tap Automatic time zone to allow the network to set the  
time zone.  
Accessory Settings  
This menu allows you to select the Audio output mode when  
Important! Deactivate Automatic date and time to manually set  
using a car or desk dock.  
the rest of the options.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Accessory  
Settings  
.
4. Tap Set date and tap the up and down arrows to set the  
2. Tap Dock sound to play sounds when inserting or  
Month Day, and Year then tap Set.  
,
removing the phone from the dock.  
151  
   
5. Tap Set time and tap the up and down arrows to set the  
Hour Minute, and PM AM, then tap Set  
4. Tap the Speak passwords option to activate this feature  
which reads out password information.  
,
/
.
6. Tap Select time zone, then tap a time zone.  
5. Tap the Answering/ending calls option to be able to  
accept incoming calls by pressing the home key or end  
calls using the power key.  
7. Optional: Tap Use 24-hour format. If this is not selected  
the phone automatically uses a 12-hour format.  
8. Tap Select date format and tap the date format type.  
6. Tap the Accessibility shortcut option to allow the  
accessibility shortcut under the device options to be  
used by pressing and holding the power key.  
7. Tap the TalkBack option to activate the TalkBack  
feature.  
Accessibility  
Accessibility services are special features to make using the  
device easier for those with certain physical disabilities. Use  
the Accessibility settings to activate these services.  
Note: TalkBack, when installed and enabled, speaks feedback  
Note: You can download accessibility applications from Play  
to help blind and low-vision users.  
Store and manage their use here.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Accessibility  
Settings  
Important! TalkBack can collect all of the text you enter,  
except passwords, including personal data and  
credit card numbers. It may also log your user  
interface interactions with the device.  
.
2. Tap the Auto-rotate screen to automatically rotate the  
screen from landscape to portrait when you rotate your  
phone.  
8. Tap the Font size field to change the size of the fonts  
used on the device within menus, options, etc. Choose  
from: Tiny, Small, Normal, Large, or Huge.  
3. Tap the Screen timeout option to timeout the  
accessibility feature after a defined amount of time.  
Changing Your Settings  
152  
     
9. Tap the Negative colors field to reverse the display of  
on-screen colors from White text on a Black  
background to Black text on a White background.  
10. Tap the Text-to-speech output field to adjust your text-  
Developer options  
Use the Developer options to set options for application  
development.  
Warning! The developer options are intended for development  
use only. They can cause errors to occur on your  
device and with the applications you have on it.  
11. Tap Enhance web accessibility if want to allow apps to  
install scripts from Google that make their Web content  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Developer options  
2. Tap the ON/OFF slider, located to the right of the  
Settings  
more accessible. Tap Allow  
.
.
12. Tap the Sound balance field and use the slider to set the  
Left and Right balance when using a stereo device.  
13. Tap the Mono audio field to enable stereo audio to be  
compressed into a single mono audio stream for use  
with a single earbud/earphone.  
Developer options field, to turn ON  
.
ON  
3. The following options are available:  
• Desktop backup password: allows you to protect your  
desktop with a backup password ID.  
14. Tap the Turn off all sounds field to mute every sound  
made by the device during taps, selections,  
• Stay awake: with the Stay awake option enabled, your screen  
will never sleep while you are charging the phone.  
• Protect SD card: requires apps to ask your permission before  
accessing data on your SD card.  
notifications, etc.  
15. Tap the Tap and hold delay field to select a time interval  
for this action. Choose from: Short, Medium, or Long.  
• USB debugging: allows debugging when the device is  
attached to a PC by a USB cable.  
153  
       
• Allow mock locations: used by developers when developing  
location-based applications.  
• Disable hardware overlays: Assigns the work of redendering  
to the GPU.  
• Select app to be debugged: allows developers to select a  
specific app to debug.  
• Force GPU rendering: allows the use of 2D hardware  
accelerations in applications.  
• Wait for debugger: specified apps must have debugger  
attached before executing.  
• Strict mode: Makes the screen flash when applications  
perform long operations on the main thread.  
• Show CPU usage: Screen highlights the current CPU usage.  
• GPU rendering profile : Uses a 2D acceleration in applications.  
• Enable traces: Enables/disables on-screen tracing based on  
an available parameter.  
• Show touches: Displays touch interactions on the screen.  
• Show pointer location: Highlights the data that was touched  
on the screen.  
• Show layout boundaries: displays clip bounds, margins, etc.  
• Show GPU view updates: flashes views inside windows when  
drawn with GPU.  
• Do not keep activities: destroys every activity as soon as the  
application is closed.  
• Show screen updates: Areas of the screen flash when they  
update.  
• Limit background processes: sets the number of processes  
that can run in the background.  
• Window animation scale: Configure the scale for animation  
(ranges from off to 10x).  
• Show all ANRs: displays a prompt when applications running  
in the background are not responding.  
Transition animation scale: Configure the scale for  
transitioning when using animation (ranges from off to 10x).  
• Animator duration scale: Configure the scale for duration  
when using animation (ranges from off to 10x).  
About Device  
This menu contains legal information, system tutorial  
information, and other phone information such as the model  
number, firmware version, baseband version, kernal version,  
and software build number.  
Changing Your Settings  
154  
     
To access phone information:  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
• Android version: displays the android version loaded on this  
handset.  
Settings  
About  
device  
.
• Baseband version: displays the baseband version loaded on  
this handset.  
2. The following information displays:  
• Software update: allows you to update your phone software, if  
• Kernel version: displays the kernel version loaded on this  
handset.  
• Build number: displays the software, build number.  
• Status: displays the battery status, the level of the battery  
(percentage), network, signal strength, mobile network type,  
service state, roaming status, mobile network state, the phone  
number for this device, ERI version, IMEI number, IP address,  
Wi-Fi MAC address, Bluetooth address, Serial number, Up  
time, and Device status.  
Note: Baseband, kernal and build numbers are usually used  
for updates to the handset or support. For additional  
information please contact your AT&T service  
representative.  
Software Update  
• Legal information: This option displays information about  
Open source licenses as well as Google legal information. This  
information clearly provides copyright and distribution legal  
information and facts as well as Google Terms of Service,  
Terms of Service for Android-powered Phones, and much more  
pertinent information as a reference. Read the information and  
The AT&T Software Update feature enables you to use your  
phone to connect to the network and upload any new phone  
software directly to your phone. The phone automatically  
updates with the latest available software when you access  
this option.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
device Software update  
2. Tap Check for updates  
Settings  
About  
terms, then press  
to return to the Settings menu.  
.
• Model number: displays the phone’s model number.  
.
155  
   
3. At the Software update prompt, tap OK to continue.  
4. The phone automatically updates the software (if  
available), otherwise, when the Current software is up  
to date prompt is displayed, tap OK  
.
5. When updating software, once the update file is  
downloaded, you can delay the update on the start  
screen by postponing it for a certain period of time. If  
you want to resume the update before the selected  
time, tap Continue update  
.
Changing Your Settings  
156  
Section 9: Connections  
This section describes the various connections your phone  
can make including accessing the Internet with your  
Browser, Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, and Connecting your PC.  
Zooming in and out of the Browser  
There are several ways to Zoom in and out on your browser.  
After tapping on a link or article, use one of these methods:  
Internet  
Tilting: Tap and hold the screen at two points then tilt the device  
back and forth to reduce or enlarge the screen. You must first  
enable motion in the Settings section. For more information, refer  
The Browser is your access to the mobile web. This section  
explains how to navigate the Browser and introduces you to  
the basic features.  
Accessing the Mobile Web  
To access the Browser:  
Double tap: Quickly tap the screen twice on the web page to  
zoom in or out.  
Pinching: Sweep in opposite directions at the same time to zoom  
in or out (use a pinching-in or pinching-out motion).  
From the Home screen, tap Internet  
.
The AT&T/YAHOO! mobile homepage displays.  
Browser Options  
Navigating with the Browser  
1. To select an item, tap an entry.  
1. From the home page, press  
following options:  
to access the  
2. To scroll through a website, sweep the screen with  
your finger in an up or down motion.  
3. Sweep the screen left to right to move laterally across  
a web page.  
• Home: displays the home web page.  
• New window: displays a new window so you can browse  
4. To return to a previous page, press  
5. To move forward to a web page, press  
157  
.
• Add bookmark: allows you to add a URL to your bookmark list  
.
       
• Add shortcut to home screen: allows you to add a shortcut to  
your Home screen.  
Enter a URL  
You can access a website quickly by entering the URL.  
• Share page: allows you to share the page using Gmail or as a  
message.  
Websites are optimized for viewing on your phone.  
To enter a URL and go to a particular website, follow these  
steps:  
1. Tap the URL field at the top of your screen.  
• Find on page: allows you to search in the current page.  
• Desktop view: allows you to assign the browser to display the  
current page in the desktop view (to closely mimic the display  
as it would appear on a desktop computer).  
2. Enter the URL using the on-screen keypad.  
The website displays.  
• Save for offline reading: allows you to store the current page  
in memory so that it can be read later even if you loose your  
Internet connection.  
Search the Internet  
To perform an internet search using keywords, follow these  
steps:  
• Brightness: allows you to set the screen brightness.  
• Downloads: displays the download history.  
• Print: allows you to print the screen or web page on a  
Samsung printer using Wi-Fi.  
1. From the Google homepage, tap the URL field.  
2. Enter the keyword(s) to search using the on-screen  
keypad and tap Go  
.
3. Tap a link to view the website.  
• Settings: allows you to modify your web settings. For more  
Adding and Deleting Windows  
You can have up to eight Internet windows open at one time.  
To add a new window, follow these steps:  
1. From your browser, press  
New window.  
A new browser window is opened.  
Connections  
158  
   
2
2. Tap  
windows.  
3. Tap a window listing to open up that Internet window.  
4. Tap at the top right corner of the web page  
thumbnail to delete the window.  
(
Windows) to see thumbnails of all open  
To exit from the incognito window:  
1. From your browser window, tap  
2
(Windows) ➔  
(New window).  
2. Scroll across the available windows and locate the  
incognito window.  
3. Tap  
window.  
next to the incognito listing to delete this  
Going Incognito  
The incognito feature allows you to view Internet sites  
outside of the normal browsing. Pages viewed in this  
incognito window won’t appear within your browser history  
or search history, and no traces (such as cookies) are left on  
your device.  
Using Bookmarks  
While navigating a website, you can bookmark a site to  
quickly and easily access it at a future time. The URLs  
(website addresses) of the bookmarked sites are displayed in  
the Bookmarks page. From the Bookmarks page you can  
also view your Most visited websites and view your History.  
Note: Any downloaded files will be preserved and will stay on your  
device after you exit the incognito mode.  
1. From the Home webpage, tap  
(Bookmarks).  
The Bookmarks page is displayed.  
To add a new incognito window:  
2
1. From your browser window, tap  
Incognito).  
2. A new browser window displays.  
(Windows) ➔  
2. Press  
to display the following options:  
(
• List/Thumbnail view: Select Thumbnail view (default) to view  
a thumbnail of the webpage with the name listed, or select List  
view to view a list of the bookmarks with Name and URL listed.  
• Create folder: Creates a new folder in which to store new  
bookmarks.  
Note: The incognito icon appears in the upper-left of the new  
browser window while you are in this mode.  
159  
       
• Change order: Rearranges the current bookmarks.  
• Move to folder: Selected bookmarks are moved to a selected  
folder.  
Adding Bookmarks  
1. From any webpage, tap  
.
2. Use the on-screen keypad to enter the Name, Address,  
• Delete: Erases selected bookmarks.  
and Location.  
3. Tap a bookmark to view the webpage, or touch and  
hold a bookmark for the following options:  
• Open: Opens the webpage of the selected bookmark.  
• Open in new window: Opens the webpage in a new window.  
• Edit bookmark: Allows you to edit the name or URL of the  
3. Tap Save.  
4. Saved to bookmarks will appear at the bottom of the  
page.  
Editing Bookmarks  
1. From the Bookmarks page, tap and hold the bookmark  
you want to edit.  
2. Tap Edit bookmark  
.
• Add shortcut to home screen: Adds a shortcut to the  
bookmarked webpage to your phone’s Home screen.  
• Share link: Allows you to share a URL address using many  
different options.  
3. Use the on-screen keypad to edit the Name, Address,  
and Location.  
4. Tap Save  
.
Deleting Bookmarks  
1. From the Bookmarks page, tap and hold the bookmark  
you want to delete.  
• Copy link URL: Allows you to copy the URL address to use in a  
message.  
• Delete bookmark: Allows you to delete a bookmark. For more  
• Set as homepage: Sets the bookmark to your new homepage.  
2. Tap Delete bookmark  
.
3. At the Delete confirmation window, tap OK  
.
Connections  
160  
         
4. Press  
Clear history to delete the History list.  
Emptying the Cookies  
A cookie is a small file which is placed on your phone by a  
website during navigation. In addition to containing some  
site-specific information, it can also contain some personal  
information (such as a username and password) which can  
pose a security risk if not properly managed. You can clear  
these cookies from your phone at any time.  
Saved Pages  
The Saved pages list provides you with a list of the websites  
that you have saved.  
1. From the Home webpage, tap  
Saved pages tab.  
A list of your saved webpages is displayed with Name  
and URL address. The webpages that have been visited  
the most will appear at the top.  
1. From the Home webpage, press  
Settings  
Privacy and security Clear all cookie data  
.
2. Tap any entry to display the webpage.  
2. At the Clear prompt, tap OK to delete the cookies or tap  
Cancel to exit.  
Browser Settings  
To make adjustments in your browser settings, follow these  
steps:  
Using your History  
The History list provides you with a list of the most recently  
visited websites. These entries can be used to return to  
previously unmarked web pages.  
1. Tap Internet  
Settings.  
2. The following options are available:  
1. From the Home webpage, tap  
History tab.  
General  
A list of your most recently visited websites is  
displayed with Name and URL address.  
• Set home page: Sets the current home page for the Web  
browser.  
2. Tap on a category such as Today  
,
Last 7 days, or Most  
• Form auto-fill: allows you to fill in web forms with a single tap.  
• Auto-fill text: allows you to enter text to be used in the Form  
auto-fill feature.  
visited  
.
3. Tap any entry to display the webpage.  
161  
   
Privacy and security  
• Clear passwords: Deletes any previously stored usernames or  
passwords. Tap OK to complete the process.  
• Enable notifications: Allows website notifications. Select  
Always on, On demand, or Off.  
• Clear cache: Deletes all currently cached data. Tap OK to  
complete the process.  
• Clear history: Clears the browser navigation history. Tap OK to  
complete the process.  
• Clear notifications: Deletes website notification access  
information.  
• Show security warnings: Notifies you if there is a security  
issue with the current website.  
Accessibility  
• Accept cookies: Allows sites, that require cookies, to save and  
read cookies from your device.  
• Force zoom: allows you to override the website’s request to  
control zoom.  
• Clear all cookie data: Deletes all current browser cookie files.  
• Remember form data: Allows the device to store data from  
any previously filled out forms. Remove the checkmark to  
disable this function.  
Text size: allows you to preview the text size, scale the text size  
using a slider bar, set the zoom amount on double tap, and  
minimize the font size using a slider bar.  
• Inverted screen rendering: allows you to preview a website  
page, select Inverted rendering (black becomes white and vice  
versa), and adjust the Contrast using a slider bar.  
Advanced  
• Clear form data: Deletes any stored data from previously filled  
out forms. Tap OK to complete the process.  
• Enable location: Allows websites to request access to your  
location.  
• Select search engine: allows you to set your default search  
engine to Google, Yahoo!, or Bing.  
• Clear location access: Clears location access for all websites.  
Tap OK to complete the process.  
• Open in background: New pages are launched in a separate  
page and displayed behind the current one. Remove the  
checkmark to disable this function.  
• Remember passwords: Stores usernames and passwords for  
visited sites. Remove the checkmark to disable this function.  
Connections  
162  
• Enable JavaScript: Enables Javascript for the current Web  
page. Without this feature, some pages may not display  
properly. Remove the checkmark to disable this function.  
• Allow multiple tabs per app: Allows you to use multiple  
navigation tabs per application.  
Text encoding: Adjusts the current text encoding.  
• Reset to default: Clears all browser data and resets all settings  
to default.  
Bandwidth management  
• Preload search results: Allows the browser to preload high  
confidence search results in the background to help speed up  
searches.  
• Enable plug-ins: Allows the download of plug-ins such as  
Adobe Flash.  
• Default storage: Allows you to set your default storage to  
Phone or Memory Card.  
• Page preloading: Allows the browser to preload pages in the  
background.  
• Website settings: View advanced settings for individual  
websites.  
• Load images: Allows web page images to be loaded along  
with the other text components of a loaded website.  
Labs  
• Default zoom: Adjusts the zoom feature. Set to Far, Medium,  
or Close.  
• Quick controls: allows you to open quick controls and hide the  
app and URL bars by swiping your thumb from the left or right  
edge of the screen.  
• Open pages in overview: Shows an overview of newly opened  
web pages.  
• Auto-fit pages: Allows web pages to be resized to fit as much  
of the screen as possible.  
• Full screen: allows you to access Full screen mode and hide  
the status bar.  
• Block pop-ups: Prevents popup advertisement or windows  
from appearing onscreen. Remove the checkmark to disable  
this function.  
163  
Connect to a Wi-Fi Network  
Wi-Fi  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Settings  
Wi-Fi.  
About Wi-Fi  
The network names and security settings (Open  
network or Secured with WEP) of detected Wi-Fi  
networks are displayed in the Wi-Fi networks section.  
Wi-Fi (short for "wireless fidelity"and sometimes referred to  
as wifi) is a term used for certain types of Wireless Local  
Area Networks (WLAN). These device types use an 802.11  
wireless specification to transmit and receive wireless data.  
Wi-Fi communication requires access to an existing and  
accessible Wireless Access Point (WAP). These WAPs can  
either be Open (unsecured) as within most Hot Spots, or  
Secured (requiring knowledge of the Router name and  
password).  
2. Tap the network you want to connect to.  
Note: When you select an open network, you will be  
automatically connected to the network.  
3. Enter a wireless password if necessary.  
Turning Wi-Fi On  
By default, your device’s Wi-Fi feature is turned off. Turning  
Wi-Fi on makes your device able to discover and connect to  
compatible in-range WAPs.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
2. Tap the ON/OFF slider, located to the right of the Wi-Fi  
field, to turn Wi-Fi ON  
Manually add your new network connection  
1. Tap Add Wi-Fi network  
.
2. Enter the Network SSID. This is the name of your  
Wireless Access Point.  
Settings.  
3. Tap the Security field and select a security option. This  
must match the current security setting on your target  
WAP.  
.
ON  
4. If secured, you will also need to enter your WAP’s  
password.  
Connections  
164  
     
5. Tap Save to store the new information and connect to  
Wi-Fi Status Indicators  
The following icons show your Wi-Fi connection status at a  
your target WAP.  
glance:  
Note: The next time your device connects to a previously  
accessed or secured wireless network, you are not  
prompted to enter the WAP key again, unless you reset  
your device back to its factory default settings.  
Displays when Wi-Fi is connected, active, and  
communicating with a Wireless Access Point  
(WAP).  
Displays when Wi-Fi is active but there is a  
communication issue with the target Wireless  
Access Point (WAP).  
Turning Wi-Fi Off  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Settings.  
Displays when connected to another device using  
2. Tap the ON/OFF slider, located to the right of the Wi-Fi  
field, to turn Wi-Fi OFF OFF  
.
Wi-Fi Advanced Settings  
The Advanced Wi-Fi menu allows you to set up many of your  
device’s Wi-Fi service, including:  
Note: Use of wireless data connections such as Wi-Fi and  
Bluetooth can cause an added drain to your battery and  
reduce your use times.  
Network notification when an open network is available  
Setting your Wi-Fi sleep policy  
Manually Scan for a Wi-Fi Network  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Settings  
Wi-Fi.  
Checking for Wi-Fi Internet service  
2. Tap Scan  
.
Automatically connecting to an AT&T Wi-Fi hotspot when detected  
Viewing your device’s MAC and IP Address  
All available Wi-Fi networks are displayed.  
165  
To access the Advanced Wi-Fi menu:  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
6. Once the device you want to connect to is displayed,  
tap on it.  
Settings  
Wi-Fi.  
2. Press  
Advanced  
.
7. The other device has 2 minutes to tap Accept for the  
connection to be made.  
8. Once connected, the other device will show as  
Connected in your list of Wi-Fi Direct devices and the  
icon will display at the top of your screen.  
Wi-Fi Direct  
Wi-Fi Direct allows device-to-device connections so you can  
9. To change your Device name, press  
device  
10. For additional information about Wi-Fi Direct, press  
Help  
Rename  
transfer large amounts of data over a Wi-Fi connection.  
.
Note: See your service plan for applicable charges for Wi-Fi  
Direct.  
.
Sharing Information with Connected Device  
To share Videos, Photos, or other information with the  
connected device, follow these steps:  
1. View the information that you want to share. For  
example, if you want to share a photo, find the photo in  
your camera viewer or My Files folder, then tap the  
Share, Share via, or Send via option.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
2. Tap the ON/OFF slider, located to the right of the Wi-Fi  
field, to turn Wi-Fi ON  
Settings  
Wi-Fi.  
.
ON  
3. At the bottom of the Wi-Fi screen, tap the Wi-Fi Direct  
button.  
4. Repeat steps 1 - 3 on the other device you want to  
connect with. The steps on a different model of phone,  
may be different.  
2. Tap the Wi-Fi Direct option.  
3. Tap the connected device name. For example,  
Android_49ba.  
5. On your phone, tap Scan  
.
The device scans for other Wi-Fi Direct devices.  
Connections  
166  
   
4. The file is transferred and the other device will receive  
5. Follow the onscreen instructions to use AT&T Wi-Fi.  
a screen notification that a Wi-Fi file has been  
received. The file can be found in My files  
sdcard0 in  
www.att.com/smartwifi  
.
the ShareViaWifi folder.  
NFC  
NFC (Near Field Communication) allows data exchange when  
you touch your device with another compatible device. This  
is used for applications such as S Beam. To activate NFC on  
Note: Depending on the other device model, the prompts and  
shared folder information may differ.  
AT&T Smart Wi-Fi  
S Beam  
With AT&T Smart Wi-Fi, you can maximize your battery  
performance, maximize your data, simplify access to AT&T  
Hot Spots and Wi-Fi networks, automate your Wi-Fi  
connections, and track your data use.  
When S Beam is activated, you can beam files to another  
NFC-capable device by holding the devices close together.  
You can beam images and videos from your Gallery, music  
files from your Music Player, and more. For more information,  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Wi-Fi  
AT&T Smart  
.
2. Read the License Agreement and tap Accept to  
continue.  
3. At the Welcome screen, tap OK  
.
4. At the Initial Setting screen, tap Yes if you want AT&T  
Smart Wi-Fi to automatically connect to any hotspot  
that is available for public use. Otherwise, tap No  
.
167  
     
Bluetooth Status Indicators  
The following icons show your Bluetooth connection status  
at a glance:  
Bluetooth  
About Bluetooth  
Bluetooth is a short-range communications technology that  
allows you to connect wirelessly to a number of Bluetooth  
devices, such as headsets and hands-free car kits, and  
Bluetooth-enabled handhelds, computers, printers, and  
wireless devices. The Bluetooth communication range is  
usually up to approximately 30 feet.  
Displays when Bluetooth is active.  
Displays when Bluetooth is connected (paired) and  
communicating.  
Turning Bluetooth On and Off  
To turn Bluetooth on:  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
2. Tap the ON/OFF slider, located to the right of the  
Bluetooth field, to turn Bluetooth ON  
Bluetooth Settings  
The Bluetooth settings menu allows you to set up many of  
the characteristics of your device’s Bluetooth service,  
including:  
Settings.  
.
ON  
Entering or changing the name your device uses for Bluetooth  
communication and description  
When active,  
appears within the Status area.  
Setting your device’s visibility (or “discoverability”) for other  
Bluetooth devices  
To turn Bluetooth off:  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
2. Tap the ON/OFF slider, located to the right of the  
Bluetooth field, to turn Bluetooth OFF OFF  
Settings.  
.
Connections  
168  
   
To access the Bluetooth Settings menu:  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
2. Verify your Bluetooth is ON  
To scan for Bluetooth devices:  
1. Verify your Bluetooth is active.  
Settings  
.
.
2. From the Bluetooth settings page, tap Scan to search  
for visible external Bluetooth-compatible devices such  
as headsets, devices, printers, and computers.  
ON  
3. Tap Bluetooth  
To change your Bluetooth name:  
1. From the Bluetooth settings page, press  
Rename device  
.
Pairing Bluetooth Devices  
.
The Bluetooth pairing process allows you to establish trusted  
connections between your device and another Bluetooth  
device. When you pair devices, they share a passkey,  
allowing for fast, secure connections while bypassing the  
discovery and authentication process.  
2. Enter a new name.  
3. Tap OK to complete the rename process.  
To make your device visible:  
1. From the Bluetooth settings page, press  
Visible  
To pair your device with another Bluetooth device:  
1. Verify your Bluetooth is active.  
time-out  
.
Making your device visible allows it to be detected by other  
devices for pairing and communication.  
2. Tap Scan. Your device will display a list of discovered  
in-range Bluetooth devices.  
2. Select a time that you would like your device visibility  
3. Tap a device from the list to initiate pairing.  
to time-out.  
4. Enter the passkey or PIN code, if needed, and tap OK  
5. The external device will then have to also accept the  
connection and enter your device’s PIN code.  
Once successfully paired to an external device,  
appears within the Status area.  
.
To show received files:  
From the Bluetooth settings page, press  
Received files  
A list of all files received from Bluetooth is displayed.  
.
169  
 
Note: Due to different specifications and features of other  
Bluetooth-compatible devices, display and operations  
may be different, and functions such as transfer or  
exchange may not be possible with all Bluetooth  
compatible devices.  
Note: Disconnections are manually done but often occur  
automatically if the paired device goes out of range of  
your phone or it is powered off.  
Deleting a paired device (unpair)  
Deleting a device from your list removes its “connection  
record” and upon reconnection would require that you re-  
enter all the previous pairing information.  
Note: Pairing between two Bluetooth devices is a one-time  
process. Once a pairing has been created, the devices  
will continue to recognize their partnership and  
exchange information without having to re-enter a  
passcode again.  
1. Verify your Bluetooth is active.  
2. From the Bluetooth settings page, tap  
next to the  
previously paired device. This opens the connected  
device’s menu options.  
Disconnecting a paired device  
3. Tap Unpair to delete the paired device.  
4. Tap Rename to change the name of the paired device.  
5. Tap Call audio to enable or disable call audio from the  
paired device.  
Disconnecting a paired device breaks the connection  
between the device and your phone, but retains the  
knowledge of the pairing. At a later point when you wish to  
reconnect the device, there is no need to setup the  
connection information again.  
6. Tap Media audio to enable or disable media audio from  
the paired device.  
1. Verify your Bluetooth is active.  
2. From the Bluetooth settings page, tap the previously  
paired device (from the bottom of the page).  
3. Tap OK to confirm disconnection.  
Connections  
170  
8. A Bluetooth share notification will appear in your  
Sending Contacts via Bluetooth  
Depending on your paired devices’ settings and capabilities,  
you may be able to send pictures, Contact information, or  
other items using a Bluetooth connection.  
notifications list.  
PC Connections  
You can connect your device to a PC using your PC data  
cable using various USB connection modes.  
Note: Prior to using this feature, Bluetooth must first be  
Storage: allows you to use the onboard storage capacity of  
the phone to store and upload files. This option allows your  
computer to detect the phone as a removable storage drive.  
enabled, and the recipient’s device must be visible.  
1. Verify your Bluetooth is active.  
Kies air: this application allows you to sync your Windows PC  
wirelessly with your phone provided they are both on the  
same Wi-Fi network.  
2. From the Home screen, tap Contacts  
3. Press Import/Export Share namecard via  
4. Tap each contact that you would like to send via  
.
.
Kies: allows you to manage music, movies and photos. You  
can also backup precious contacts and calendars, download  
apps and podcasts and automatically upgrade device  
firmware. Kies conveniently syncs your life across all your  
devices.  
Bluetooth. A green checkmark will appear next to each  
entry you select.  
5. Tap Done  
.
6. Tap Bluetooth  
.
7. Select the paired device to send the contacts to.  
available at http://www.samsung.com/kies (for Windows/  
Mac).  
Note: The external Bluetooth device must be visible and  
communicating for the pairing to be successful.  
171  
     
Kies air  
Note: If you are a Windows XP user, ensure that you have  
Windows XP Service Pack 3 or higher installed on your  
computer. Also, ensure that you have Samsung Kies 2.0  
or Windows Media Player 10 or higher installed on your  
computer.  
Kies air allows you to sync your Windows PC wirelessly with  
your phone provided they are both on the same Wi-Fi  
network. You can view and share call logs, videos, photos,  
music, bookmarks, ringtones, and even send SMS messages  
from your PC.  
To use the Kies air, follow these steps:  
1. Sign onto the same Wi-Fi network from your phone and  
from your PC.  
Connecting as a Storage Device  
You can connect your device to a PC as a removable disk and  
access the file directory. If you insert a memory card in the  
device, you can also access the files directory from the  
memory card by using the device as a memory card reader.  
2. On your phone, from the Home screen, tap  
Kies air  
.
Note: The file directory of the memory card displays as a  
Note: The first time you use Kies air, you will need to download  
removable disk, separate from the internal memory.  
the application from the Market.  
1. Connect the USB cable to the device and connect the  
cable to the computer. After a few seconds, a pop-up  
window displays on the PC when connected.  
3. Sign on to your Google account if you have not already  
done so.  
4. At the Install screen, tap Ok  
.
2. On the PC pop-up, click Open device to view files  
.
5. Follow the on-screen instructions to download the  
3. Copy files from the PC to the memory card.  
updated application from the Play Store.  
6. From the Kies air homescreen, tap Start  
.
A web URL is displayed on your phone screen.  
Connections  
172  
   
7. From your PC, enter the URL in your web browser.  
8. On your phone, an Access Request prompt is  
displayed. Tap Allow to continue.  
9. Tap the Remember for today checkbox if you will be  
using Kies air with the same PC later.  
10. From your PC, a security warning may be displayed  
asking if you want to run this application. Click Run to  
continue.  
11. On your PC, the Kies air screen is displayed. On your  
phone, the  
icon appears at the top of your screen.  
12. Follow the on-screen instructions to view and share  
information between your phone and PC.  
13. To exit the Kies air application, tap Stop on your phone,  
then close out the web browser on your PC.  
NFC  
NFC (Near Field Communication) allows data exchange when  
you touch your device with another compatible device. This  
is used for applications such as S Beam. For information on  
NFC and NFC related features, see “NFC” on page 127.  
173  
   
Section 10: Applications  
This section contains a description of each application that is  
available in the Apps Menu, its function, and how to navigate  
through that particular application. If the application is  
already described in another section of this user manual,  
then a cross reference to that particular section is provided.  
AllShare Play  
This application wirelessly synchronizes your Samsung  
device with your TV, streams content, and even keeps tabs  
on who calls or sends text messages with real-time,  
on-screen monitoring. Samsung’s AllShare makes staying  
connected easy.  
Note: This manual only addresses applications that have been  
loaded on your [device/computer/tablet] as of the date  
of purchase. Information concerning third party  
applications that you may choose to download from the  
Google Play Store or otherwise should be obtained  
fromthe application provider directly and not from  
Samsung.  
AllShare Play allows users to share their in-device media  
content with other external devices using DLNA certified™  
(Digital Living Network Alliance) Devices. These external  
devices must also be DLNA-compliant. Wi-Fi capability can  
be provided to TVs via a digital multimedia streamer.  
AllShare Definitions:  
AllShare  
This uses the traditional DLNA  
technology for sharing multimedia  
(photos, videos, or music) to your  
Samsung Smart TV and other DLNA  
devices.  
Tip: To open applications quickly, add the icons of frequently-  
used applications to one of the Home screens. For details,  
Applications  
174  
     
AllShare Play  
This new feature builds on the previous  
AllShare feature. It includes features  
such as Web storage integration and  
social networking integration. This is a  
Web service that requires using a  
Samsung account.  
Important! You must first connect both of your communicating  
devices to the same Wi-Fi and be using an  
active/registered Samsung account prior to using  
AllShare Play/Group A subset feature of AllShare Play, this  
Cast  
allows you to mirror photos and  
multimedia presentations with other  
members of your current Wi-Fi group.  
Users must be on the same Wi-Fi and  
provide an access code to join the  
group.  
Important! The Samsung account manages the access  
information (username/password) to several  
applications, such as AllShare Play, ChatON, and  
Media Hub.  
AllShare Cast (with This feature functions with an external  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
AllShare Play  
.
Hub accessory)  
Wi-Fi AllShareCast Hub connected to a  
TV. It allows you to fully mirror what is  
currentlydisplayedonyourdevicetothe  
external TV.  
The AllShare Play screen is displayed.  
2. If prompted, read the on-screen message about  
network charges and tap OK to continue and return to  
the main AllShare Play screen.  
3. Tap Start and follow the on-screen prompts.  
The application contains two separate streaming media  
options:  
175  
 
• Registered Storage: allows you to receive and playback media  
stored externally (server, laptop, etc.) directly on your device by  
allowing you to add a Web storage service for streaming  
content.  
• Setting up web services: allows you to set up external Web  
services by signing in to external sites such as Facebook,  
Twitter, YouTube, etc.  
• Auto Upload photos from mobile: allows you to setup  
automatic upload of images from your device to those storage  
locations specified within the Web storage list.  
• Video quality settings: allows you to setup the video quality for  
streamed video content.  
• Registered Devices: allows you to stream/share selected  
multimedia content from your device to DLNA compliant device  
connected to the same Wireless Access Point.  
Configuring AllShare Settings  
• Lock AllShare Play: allows you to restrict access to AllShare  
Play by requiring a user enter the currently active and  
associated Samsung account password. Tap Locking  
AllShare Play to activate/deactivate the feature.  
• Language: allows you select a display language.  
• About: displays application information.  
The AllShare Play™ application must first be configured  
prior to its initial use. You must setup parameters such as  
connected Wi-Fi, Items to share, source server address, and  
external device acceptance rights.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
2. Press and then tap Settings and configure the  
following settings as desired:  
AllShare Play  
.
• Contact Us: allows you to contact the AllShare team via a new  
email from an available email account.  
• Registered Storage: allows you to add a Web storage location.  
Without a storage service/location added, you will not be able  
to use AllShare Play.  
• Registered Devices: defaults to your phone. This indicates the  
source of the streaming images and videos. Use the main  
screen to add more external devices.  
Applications  
176  
 
7. On a target device (ex: Internet TV) select the on-  
Sharing Media via AllShare Play to a Target  
Device  
screen Allow button to continue.  
Important! Make sure all communicating devices are  
Note: At this stage your device is requesting access to share  
connected to the same Wi-Fi.  
media with the external source.  
1. Launch AllShare on the target device (such as an  
8. Confirm  
(AllShare Controller enabled) appears in  
Internet TV, Samsung Tablet, etc.).  
the Notification area at the top of the device to indicate  
you are using your device as the media source.  
2. From the Home screen, tap  
AllShare Play  
.
3. Tap your device name from the Devices list.  
AllShare Play Screen Sharing via Group Cast  
4. Tap an available category tab (Pictures, Music, Movies,  
Important! Verify all of your recipients are connected to the  
Files, or Info) and select a file.  
same Wi-Fi.  
Touch and hold to select multiple files.  
A file with  
in the upper-left indicates it is stored remotely  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
2. Tap Group Cast  
Gallery  
.
on a web storage location. Selecting this media causes your  
device to access the file currently stored on your services’  
servers.  
.
3. If prompted, read the on-screen notification and tap OK  
to continue and return to the main AllShare Play  
screen.  
5. Tap an available on-screen file, image, or video to  
place a green check mark alongside it.  
4. Enter a security PIN and tap Done. This process makes  
sure only desired recipients can view your shared  
image.  
2
6. Tap  
(Stream to connected devices) to begin  
streaming the selected files.  
177  
     
5. Re-enter you PIN and tap Done. The device then waits  
for other connected recipients to accept the connection  
and enter the PIN on their screens.  
Note: The first time you use the AT&T Code Scanner, you will  
need to download the updated application from the  
Market. When the Market page displays, tap Update. For  
– or –  
Tap Start Group Cast anyway to continue the process  
2. Sign on to your Google account if you are not already  
while your users connect.  
You can now interact and draw with the on-screen image,  
users will instantaneously see the same gestures and also be  
able to interact.  
3. Read the Terms and Conditions and tap Accept to  
continue.  
Note: The newly altered image (with markups and comments)  
can not be saved, but you can take a screen shot of the  
current image and save it to your Clipboard. For more  
4. At the My Profile screen, tap OK to allow your location  
information to be used or tap Don’t Allow to bypass.  
5. Enter your information in the My Profile section.  
6. Tap ON to activate your profile. This allows the  
application to customize your results. For example,  
your zip code may help to deliver a coupon for a  
restaurant in your neighborhood. You can toggle the  
activation button between ON and OFF.  
AT&T Code Scanner  
AT&T Code Scanner allows you to scan two-dimensional (QR  
and datamatrix codes) and one-dimensional (UPC and EAN)  
barcodes found in magazines, stores, and online.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
AT&T Code Scanner  
7. Tap Done  
8. Read the tutorial and tap Next until you are at the end  
of the tutorial. Tap Finish  
.
.
.
Applications  
178  
     
9. Position your phone approximately 2-5 inches from the  
barcode. Ensure that the barcode is completely within  
the window. Keep your phone steady for best results.  
10. The scanner will automatically scan the barcode. It  
may take several seconds.  
Note: To sign up for service, visit http://www.att.com/familymap  
for more information.  
3. Follow the on-screen instructions.  
AT&T Locker  
11. After the scan, tap Yes to open the web page to view  
the information on the barcode that was scanned.  
AT&T Locker allows you to store, share, and sync all of your  
photos, videos, and documents in one safe, convenient  
AT&T FamilyMap  
AT&T FamilyMap provides peace of mind by being able to  
conveniently locate a family member from your wireless  
phone or PC and know that your family's location information  
is secure and private.  
AT&T Navigator  
AT&T Navigator provides you with access to real-time GPS-  
driven applications. These programs not only allow you to  
achieve turn-by-turn navigation, but also access local  
searches.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
AT&T FamilyMap  
.
Note: The first time you use AT&T Family Map, you will need to  
download the application from the Market. For more  
Important! You must have a data plan to use this feature.  
Note: These services require the purchase of a subscription.  
2. At the AT&T FamilyMap Sign In webpage, enter your  
To launch the AT&T Navigator application, follow these steps:  
Phone Number and Password in the appropriate fields  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
AT&T Navigator  
and tap Submit  
.
.
179  
               
2. Read the Terms of Service and tap Accept to  
acknowledge the terms of use.  
Calculator  
With this feature, you can use the phone as a calculator. The  
calculator provides the basic arithmetic functions; addition,  
subtraction, multiplication, and division. The Calculator also  
keeps a history of recent calculations.  
The first time that you use AT&T Navigator, the  
necessary files will be downloaded. The AT&T  
Navigator main screen displays.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Calculator  
.
3. Tap an AT&T Navigator plan that you choose to  
purchase.  
2. Enter the first number using the on-screen numeric  
keys.  
4. Follow the on-screen instructions.  
3. Enter the operation for your calculation by tapping the  
corresponding on-screen arithmetic function key.  
4. Enter the second number.  
AT&T Ready2Go  
AT&T Ready2Go allows you to quickly and easily setup your  
phone by using the web browser on your PC. You can set-up  
email accounts, import contacts, set wallpaper, configure Wi-  
Fi and many more features. For more information, refer to  
5. To view the result, tap equals (=).  
6. To view calculator history, tap  
located at the  
top of the calculator buttons. A history of your past  
calculations is displayed. Tap  
the calculator keypad.  
again to display  
Clear  
Text size. Tap  
AT&T Smart Wi-Fi  
With AT&T Smart Wi-Fi, you can maximize your battery  
performance, maximize your data, simplify access to AT&T  
Hot Spots and Wi-Fi networks, automate your Wi-Fi  
connections, and track your data use. For more information,  
7. To clear the calculator history, press  
history  
.
8. To change the text size, press  
Small, Medium, or Large.  
Applications  
180  
       
9. Press  
One-handed operation on to set the  
4. Tap Today to display the current date indicated by a  
display so that it is easier to use the calculator with one  
blue box.  
hand. Press  
off.  
One-handed operation off to turn it  
5. Tap Calendars to select the calendar options that you  
want displayed.  
10. Turn your phone sideways to the landscape position to  
6. Press  
and select one of the following options:  
display the scientific calculator.  
• Go to: displays a specific date.  
Calendar  
With the Calendar feature, you can consult the calendar by  
day, week, or month, create events, and set an alarm to act  
as a reminder, if necessary.  
• Delete: allows you to delete All events, All events before today,  
or an individual event.  
• Search: allows you to search within your current events.  
• Sync: allows you to synchronize your calendar with one or all of  
your accounts. This option only appears when an account has  
been opened.  
To access the Calendar:  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Calendar  
.
2. Tap Show More) to display these tabs:  
(
• Settings: displays a list of configurable settings.  
Year: displays the Year view.  
• Month: displays the Month view.  
• Week: displays the Week view.  
• Day: displays the Day view.  
7. Tap  
(Handwriting mode) to activate handwriting  
mode. This allows you to jot down freehand notes  
using your S pen or finger.  
Calendar Settings  
1. From any Calendar view, press  
2. Tap Month view styles and select an option.  
3. Tap Week view and select a type: Timeline or Analog  
• List: displays the List view.  
Settings.  
Task: allows you to search for tasks.  
3. Tap  
event.  
(Create event) to create a new Calendar  
.
181  
     
4. Tap First day of week and select either Local default,  
Saturday, Sunday or Monday  
12. Tap Vibration to set the Event notification tone to  
vibrate.  
.
5. Tap Hide declined events to activate this option. A check  
mark indicates selection.  
13. Tap Default reminder time to assign a default time  
frame for event reminders.  
6. Tap Lock time zone (to lock event time based on your  
current user-selected time zone). Select a time zone  
from within the Select time zone field.  
14. Tap Notifications while screen is off to display  
notifications on the full screen while it is turned off.  
15. Tap Quick responses to select quick responses to  
emailing guests.  
7. Tap Show week number to display the week numbers  
along the side of the week entries.  
16. Tap Swipe with two fingers to change the way events  
are displayed when swiped.  
8. Tap Calendars and select the type of general  
synchronization settings you want. A check mark  
indicates selection.  
Camera  
Use your 8.0 megapixel camera feature to produce photos in a  
JPEG format. Your phone also functions as a Camcorder to take  
9. Tap Handwriting settings and configure handwriting-  
related calendar settings such as: First day of week  
and Show week number.  
ChatON  
10. Tap Set alerts & notifications to adjust the event  
With the ChatON application, you can interact with friends  
and family with text, images, hand-written notes and video  
shared instantly. You can chat in groups, while a Web client  
will allow the easy sharing of content and conversations  
notification method. Choose from: Alert  
,
Status bar  
notification, and Off  
.
11. Tap Select ringtone to assign a ringtone to a calendar  
event notification.  
Applications  
182  
     
Alarm tone: sets the sound file which is played when the  
alarm is activated. Select an option or tap Add for additional  
options.  
Clock  
The Clock application allows you to access alarms, view the  
World Clock, set a stopwatch, and use a timer.  
Location alarm: when activated, the alarm only sounds  
when you are at a specific location. Touch and slide the  
Alarm  
This feature allows you to set an alarm to ring at a specific  
time.  
slider to the right to turn it on  
screen instructions to enter a location.  
then follow the on-  
ON  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Alarm Create alarm . The following options  
display:  
• Time: tap  
alarm to sound. Tap AM or PM.  
Clock  
Snooze: use this option to set a Duration (3, 5, 10, 15, or 30  
Minutes) and Snooze repeat (1, 2, 3, 5, or 10 Times). Tap  
the ON/OFF slider to activate.  
(Up) or  
(Down) to set the new time for the  
Smart alarm: tracks body movements and calculates the  
best time for sounding the alarm. Place the phone  
somewhere on your bed then the phone's movement sensor  
(also known as accelerometer) is sensitive enough to work  
from any part of the bed. Set the Interval and the Tone. Tap  
the ON/OFF slider to activate.  
• Alarm repeat: use this option to set the repeating status for the  
alarm by tapping one the days that you want the alarm to  
sound. Tap the Repeat weekly checkbox to have the alarm  
repeat weekly.  
• Alarm type: sets the way in which the alarm sounds when  
activated (Melody, Vibration, Vibration and melody, and  
Briefing).  
Name: allows you to use a specific name for the alarm. The  
name will appear on the display when the alarm activates.  
2. Tap Save to store the alarm details.  
• More: displays the following additional options:  
Alarm volume: drag the slider to adjust the alarm’s volume.  
183  
       
Turning Off an Alarm  
World Clock  
To stop an alarm when it sounds, touch and sweep the  
icon to the right.  
World Clock allows you to view the time of day or night in  
other parts of the world. World Clock displays time in  
hundreds of different cities, within all 24 time zones around  
the world.  
Setting the Snooze Feature  
To activate the Snooze feature after an alarm sounds,  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Clock  
Z
Z
touch and sweep the  
icon to the left. Snooze must  
World Clock. The clock for your time zone is displayed.  
2. Tap Add city to add another city to the World Clock.  
3. Scroll through the list of cities to find the city you want  
to add, or tap the Search bar and use the keypad to  
enter a city to search for.  
first be set in the alarm settings. For more information,  
Deleting Alarms  
To delete an alarm, follow these steps:  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Clock  
4. Tap the city you want to add. The clock for that city will  
display.  
Alarm  
Delete.  
2. Tap the alarm or alarms you wish to delete. A green  
checkmark will appear next to each selection. Tap  
Select all to delete all alarms.  
5. To set Daylight Savings time, press and hold a city,  
then tap DST settings  
.
6. Select Automatic Off, or 1 hour  
,
.
3. Tap Delete  
.
7. If Daylight Savings Time is selected, a sun symbol on  
the World Clock listing will appear.  
Applications  
184  
     
Deleting a World Clock Entry  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
2. The Minutes field is highlighted and set to 1 minute.  
Use the keypad to set the number of minutes you want.  
3. Tap the Hours field to set hours if desired. As you tap  
different fields, they will become highlighted.  
4. Tap the Seconds field to set seconds.  
Clock  
World Clock  
Delete.  
2. Press and hold the city clocks you wish to delete.  
3. Tap Delete  
.
5. Tap Start to begin the timer and tap Stop to pause the  
timer.  
Stopwatch  
You can use this option to measure intervals of time.  
1. From the Home screen, tap Clock  
Stopwatch  
6. After stopping, tap Restart to continue or tap Reset to  
set the timer back to the original setting.  
.
Desk clock  
2. Tap Start to start the stopwatch and tap Lap to mark a  
unit of time per lap.  
You can use the Desk clock when you have a desk dock and  
you want your phone to display the time, day, date, location,  
and weather conditions when it is docked.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Desk clock  
The default Desk clock is displayed.  
2. Tap to display the Desk clock in full-screen mode.  
3. To make changes, tap Settings  
3. Tap Stop to stop the stopwatch.  
4. Tap Restart to continue or tap Reset to erase all times  
recorded.  
Clock  
.
Timer  
You can use this option to set a countdown timer. Use a timer  
to count down to an event based on a preset time length  
(hours, minutes, and seconds).  
.
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Timer  
Clock  
4. The following options are displayed while in full-screen  
.
mode:  
185  
     
• Hide status bar: when this is checked, the status bar is hidden  
from view.  
DeviceHelp  
• Wallpaper: tap to select Desk clock wallpaper from Default,  
Gallery, or Same as home screen.  
DeviceHelp provides online information to help with your  
device questions.  
• Calendar: when this is checked, the calendar is displayed. Tap  
to uncheck.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
DeviceHelp  
.
The AT&T Device Help screen is displayed.  
• AccuWeather: when this is activated, the location,  
temperature, and weather condition is displayed. Touch and  
2. Follow the on-screen instructions for accessing helpful  
slide the slider to the right to turn it on  
.
ON  
information.  
• Brightness: sets your Desk clock brightness by dragging the  
slider bar to the desired level.  
Downloads  
The Downloads application allows you to manage all of your  
downloads from the Play Store and the Browser.  
• Dock: allows you to set your Dock settings such as Dock  
sound, Audio output mode, Desk home screen display, and  
HDMI Audio output.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Downloads  
.
All of your downloads are listed.  
Contacts  
2. Tap the Internet downloads tab to see all of the  
downloads you have made from the Browser.  
3. Tap the Other downloads tab to see all other  
downloads.  
You can manage your daily contacts by storing their name  
and number in your Address Book. Address Book entries can  
be sorted by name, entry, or group.  
You can also synchronize your phone Address Book with  
AT&T Address Book, the network backup service.  
4. Tap Sort by size to see your downloads sorted in size  
order.  
Applications  
186  
         
5. Tap Sort by date to see your downloads sorted in time  
Gallery  
order.  
The Gallery is where you view photos and play back videos.  
For photos, you can also perform basic editing tasks, view a  
slideshow, set photos as wallpaper or contact image, and  
share as a picture message. For more information, refer to  
Email  
Email enables you to review and create email using various  
email services. You can also receive message alerts when  
you receive an important email. For more information, refer  
Gmail  
Gmail is a web-based email service. Gmail is configured  
when you first set up your phone. Depending on your  
synchronization settings, Gmail can automatically  
synchronize with your Gmail account on the web. For more  
Flipboard  
This application creates a personalized digital magazine out  
of everything being shared with you. Access news stories,  
personal feeds and other related material. Flip through your  
Facebook newsfeed, tweets from your Twitter account,  
photos from friends and much more.  
Google  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Flipboard  
.
The Google Search application is the same on-screen  
Internet search engine that is on the Google Search Bar on  
2. Tap Get started, select some on-screen categories and  
tap Done to create a new profile.  
– or –  
Google +  
Tap Sign In to log into your previously created profile.  
Google+ makes messaging and sharing with your friends a  
lot easier. You can set up Circles of friends, visit the Stream  
to get updates from your Circles, use Messenger for fast  
messaging with everyone in your Circles, or use Instant  
3. Follow the on-screen instructions.  
187  
                   
Upload to automatically upload videos and photos to your  
own private album on Google+. For more information, refer  
2. From the Home screen, tap  
Latitude  
.
Your location is displayed on the map, accurate to 40  
meters.  
Internet  
Sharing your Location with Friends  
1. From the Latitude map screen, tap FRIENDS LIST to  
display your Latitude friends. At first, only your name is  
displayed.  
Open the web browser to start surfing the web. The browser  
is fully optimized and comes with advanced functionality to  
enhance the Internet browsing feature on your phone. For  
2. Tap  
3. Tap Select from Contacts or Add via email address  
4. Tap a contact or enter an email address and tap Add  
friends  
5. At the Send sharing requests prompt, tap Yes  
.
+
Kies air  
.
Kies air allows you to sync your Windows PC wirelessly with  
your phone provided they are both on the same Wi-Fi  
.
.
Your friend will receive an email or text message with  
your location marked on a map. They will also receive  
instructions on how to view your location from the web  
or use Latitude on their phone or tablet provided it is  
available. Once they acknowledge your request, their  
location will display on your phone. They can share  
their location from their computer, phone, or tablet. For  
Latitude  
With Google Latitude, you can see the location of all of your  
friends on a map or on a list. You can also share or hide your  
location.  
You must first set up your phone to use wireless networks to  
help pinpoint your location. Also, Latitude works best when  
Wi-Fi is enabled.  
1. Log on to your Google account. For more information,  
more information, go to http://www.google.com/latitude  
.
6. To view the map, tap MAP VIEW  
.
Applications  
188  
       
Location settings: allows you to manage the settings for your  
Background location reporting, Location history, Latitude  
location sharing, and Check-ins.  
Latitude Options  
From the map display, press  
to display the  
following options:  
• Clear Map: allows you to remove all markings and layers from  
the map.  
Labs: this is a testing ground for experimental features that  
aren’t ready for primetime. They may change, break or  
disappear at any time. Click on a Lab to enable or disable it.  
What’s New: allows you to see the latest changes in Play Store  
and update your app.  
• Make available offline: allows you to save a selected area to  
you My places folder where you can view it later.  
• Search: allows you to search for a place of interest.  
• Directions: displays navigation directions to a location from a  
starting point.  
About: displays general information about Google maps such  
as Version, Platform, Locale, Total data sent, Total data received,  
Free memory, etc.  
• Layers: Layers are additional items that you can have  
displayed on your map. They include Traffic, Satellite, Terrain,  
Transit Lines, Latitude, My Maps, Bicycling, and Wikipedia.  
• Settings: the following Latitude options are available:  
Feedback: allows you to send feedback to Google.  
Terms, Privacy & Notices: displays the Terms and Conditions,  
Privacy Policy, Legal Notices information, and Web History.  
Select the desired information from the pop-up menu.  
Display: allows you to display the Zoom Buttons and Scale Bar  
on the screen.  
• Help: displays the Google Mobile Help web page where you  
can receive help on Google Maps.  
Offline and cache: allows you to set options to pre-fetch map  
tiles when not using WiFi and to clear the cache that holds the  
map tiles.  
189  
Local  
Important! Before using Google Maps you must have at least  
an active data (3G) connection. The Maps  
Local is an application that uses Google Maps and your  
location to help you find Restaurants, Cafes, Bars,  
Attractions, and other businesses. You can also add your own  
locations.  
application does not cover every country or city.  
Enabling a Location Source  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Local  
.
Before you use Google Maps and find your location or search  
for places of interest, you must enable a location source. To  
enable the location source you must enable the wireless  
network, or enable the GPS satellites.  
2. Tap on one of the business categories to search for a  
particular business.  
All of the business categories that are close to you will  
be displayed.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Location services  
Settings  
.
3. Tap on a business that you want to see the details for.  
4. The business details such as address, phone, website,  
and location are displayed. You can also see reviews  
from around the web and from Google users.  
2. Tap the Use GPS satellites field. A green checkmark will  
display next to the field.  
Note: Selecting Use GPS satellites allows you to locate places  
of interest at the street-level. However, this also requires  
a clear view of the sky and uses more battery power.  
Maps  
Depending on your location, you can view basic, custom, and  
satellite maps and local business information, including  
locations, contact information, and driving directions. You  
can also post public messages about a location and track  
your friends.  
To receive better GPS signals, avoid using your device in the  
following conditions:  
inside a building or between buildings  
in a tunnel or underground passage  
Applications  
190  
         
in poor weather  
Labs: this is a testing ground for experimental features that  
aren’t ready for primetime. They may change, break or  
disappear at any time. Click on a Lab to enable or disable it.  
What’s New: allows you to see the latest changes in Play Store  
and update your app.  
around high-voltage or electromagnetic fields  
in a vehicle with tinted windows  
Using Maps  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Maps  
.
About: displays general information about Google maps such  
as Version, Platform, Locale, Total data sent, Total data received,  
Free memory, etc.  
A map will display with your location in the very center.  
2. Press  
to display the following options:  
• Clear Map: allows you to remove all markings and layers from  
the map.  
Feedback: allows you to send feedback to Google.  
Terms, Privacy & Notices: displays the Terms and Conditions,  
Privacy Policy, Legal Notices information, and Web History.  
Select the desired information from the pop-up menu.  
• Make available offline: allows you to save a selected area to  
you My places folder where you can view it later.  
• Settings: the following Map options are available:  
• Help: displays the Google Mobile Help web page where you  
can receive help on Google Maps.  
Display: allows you to display the Zoom Buttons and Scale Bar  
on the screen.  
Media Hub  
Offline and cache: allows you to set options to pre-fetch map  
tiles when not using WiFi and to clear the cache that holds the  
map tiles.  
Samsung Media Hub is your one stop for the hottest movie  
and TV content. You can rent or purchase your favorite  
content and watch from the convenience of anywhere. For  
Location settings: allows you to manage the settings for your  
Background location reporting, Location history, Latitude  
location sharing, and Check-ins.  
191  
 
Messages  
Music Hub  
The AT&T Messages app brings your texts, calls, and  
voicemail messages together into a single conversation  
thread and is accessible by phone or computer. For more  
The Music Hub app lets you upload your music collection to  
the cloud, stream and purchase songs from an extensive  
catalog, and listen to personal radio. For more information,  
Messaging  
Music Player  
You can send and receive different types of messages. For  
Music Player allows you to play music files that you have  
stored on your phone and memory card. You can also create  
Messenger  
Messenger allows you to bring groups of friends together into  
a simple group conversation. When you get a new  
conversation in Messenger, Google+ sends an update to your  
My Files  
My Files allows you to manage your sounds, images, videos,  
bluetooth files, Android files, and other memory card data in  
one convenient location.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
files  
My Files  
All  
Mobile Hotspot  
.
This application allows you to share your phones’s mobile  
data connection via USB or as a portable Wi-Fi hotspot. For  
2. Tap sdcard0 to see the contents of your internal SD  
card.  
3. The following folders may display:  
• Alarms: this folder contains any alarm files you may have.  
• Android: the Android folder stores files that are used in Android  
applications.  
Applications  
192  
                 
• Application: this folder contains app info for S Memo.  
• Bluetooth: this folder stores files sent via a Bluetooth device.  
• DCIM: this is the default location for pictures and videos taken  
4. If you have an external SD card inserted, tap extSdCard  
to see the contents of your external SD card (memory  
card).  
by the device. Tap DCIM  
Camera to view the picture or  
myAT&T  
• Download: this folder contains downloads you have made.  
• Movies: this folder contains your Video and Movie files.  
• Music: this folder contains your Music files.  
• Notifications: this folder contains all of the notifications you  
have received.  
The myAT&T application allows you to manage your own  
AT&T account. You can review and pay your bill, check  
minutes and data usage, upgrade to a new device, or change  
your rate plan.  
Note: The first time you use myAT&T, you will need to  
download the updated application from the Play Store.  
When the Play Store page displays, tap Update. For more  
• Pictures: this folder contains your photos.  
• Podcasts: this folder contains all of your podcasts.  
• Ringtones: this folder contains any ringtones you have  
purchased.  
Initial Setup  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
myAT&T  
.
2. Sign into your Google Account. If you haven’t set up an  
• S Note: this folder contains all the the S Notes you have written.  
Note: Different folders may appear depending on how your  
phone is configured.  
3. After signing into your Google Account, the Play Store  
displays the myAT&T application. Tap the application.  
4. Tap Update  
.
193  
   
5. Follow the on-screen instructions.  
around high-voltage or electromagnetic fields  
in a vehicle with tinted windows  
Using myAT&T  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
myAT&T  
.
Launching Navigation  
The myAT&T page is displayed.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Navigation  
.
2. Read the Navigation information page and tap Accept  
to continue or Don’t accept to exit.  
2. Read the Terms and Conditions and tap Accept to  
continue.  
3. Select one of the following options:  
• Speak destination: allows you to speak your destination.  
• Type destination: allows you to use the keypad to enter your  
destination.  
3. Enter your User ID and Password using the onscreen  
keypad, then tap Login  
.
4. Follow the on-screen instructions.  
Navigation  
Navigation is an internet-connected GPS navigation system  
with voice guidance. You can type or speak your destination.  
• Go home: takes you to your home address. The first time you  
are prompted to enter it.  
• Map: takes you to the map location of your present location  
using GPS.  
Note: For voice-guided navigation, you need to install text-to-  
speech support from the Play Store.  
• Recent Destinations: allows you to access information on  
previous destinations you have used. This option only appears  
after you have entered one or more destinations.  
To receive better GPS signals, avoid using your device in the  
following conditions:  
inside a building or between buildings  
in a tunnel or underground passage  
in poor weather  
Applications  
194  
   
Terms, privacy & notices: displays Terms and Conditions for  
Google mobile products, the Google Privacy Policy, and Google  
legal notices.  
Navigation Options  
The map displays with your location in the center.  
Press for the following options:  
• Exit Navigation: exits the Navigation application and returns  
you to the Application Menu screen.  
• Set Destination: displays the Choose Destination screen  
where you can speak or type your destination.  
• Search: allows you to speak or type a destination, place, or  
service to search for.  
• Help: takes you to the Google Mobile Help web page.  
Obtaining Driving Directions  
• Layers: are additional items that you can have displayed on  
your map. They include:  
Your phone’s built-in GPS hardware allows you to get real-  
time driving directions to selected locations or  
establishments based on your current location.  
Using a Physical Address  
Traffic view: displays real-time traffic conditions so you can  
plan the fastest route.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Navigation  
.
Satellite: allows you to see you the map as a satellite image.  
Parking: allows you to see registered parking areas.  
Gas stations: allows you to see registered gas stations.  
ATMs & banks: allows you to see registered ATMs and Banks.  
Restaurants: allows you to see registered restaurants.  
2. Tap either Speak Destination or Type Destination  
.
3. If typing in the address, enter the address, City, and  
State using the keypad. As you type, possible  
addresses will be displayed. Tap on one when you see  
the address you want.  
• Settings: includes the following options:  
The route will be displayed.  
Screen Dimming: set this option to dim the screen between  
instructions in order to conserve battery power.  
195  
 
4. If speaking the address, the Voice guidance screen is  
displayed. For voice-guided navigation you need to  
install text-to-speech support from the Play Store. Tap  
Install to install the application or tap Skip to exit.  
Play Books  
With Google Play Books, you can find more than 3 million  
free e-books and hundreds of thousands more to buy in the  
eBookstore.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Play Books  
.
Note: You will need to be signed on to your Google account  
before downloading applications from the Play Store. For  
2. Log on to your Google account. For more information,  
3. Follow the on-screen instructions for using the Play  
Books application.  
5. As you drive the route display will be updated and you  
Play Magazines  
With Google Play Magazines, you can subscribe to your  
favorite magazines and have them available to read on your  
phone at any time or any place.  
will receive voice-guided navigation directions.  
Paper Artist  
Paper Artist provides access to an in-device graphics  
program. You can start from an empty canvas or import a  
picture from your Gallery to get you started.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Play Magazines  
.
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Paper Artist  
.
2. Log on to your Google account if you have not already  
2. Follow the on-screen instructions.  
Phone  
3. At the Welcome! display, tap the shop icon  
to  
The Phone application allows you to access the dialer  
browse the full catalog.  
keypad, call logs, and favorites. For more information, refer  
4. Read the Google Play Terms of Service and tap Accept  
.
Applications 196  
             
5. Sweep the screen to the left or right to view  
Categories, Featured, Top Selling, and New Arrivals.  
6. Tap a magazine to see more information and  
subscribe.  
Play Store  
Play Store provides access to downloadable applications and  
games to install on your phone. Play Store also allows you to  
provide feedback and comments about an application, or flag  
an application that might be incompatible with your phone.  
7. Follow the on-screen instructions to subscribe to a  
magazine.  
Before using the Play Store you must have a Google Account.  
Play Movies & TV  
1. From the main Home screen, tap Play Store  
.
With Google Play Movies & TV, you can rent thousands of  
different movies and television shows. You can watch  
instantly, or download your movie or show for offline viewing  
2. Sign in to your Google account.  
3. The first time you sign in, the Play Store Terms of  
Service will be displayed. Tap Accept to continue or  
Decline to exit.  
4. Tap Apps Games, or AT&T to download or purchase  
,
Play Music  
games or applications. You can also download updates  
to existing applications.  
With Google Play Music, you can play music that you have  
added to your music file as well as any music you copied  
from your PC. While offline, you can listen to music you have  
5. Follow on the on-screen instructions.  
Polaris Office 4.0  
Polaris® Office Mobile for Android is a Microsoft Office  
compatible office suite. This application provides a central  
place for managing your documents online or offline. The  
application can also open Adobe PDF (Portable Document  
Format) files.  
197  
               
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Polaris Office 4.0  
S Suggest  
This application provides on-screen recommendations for  
applications that are specifically supported and made for use  
on your device.  
.
2. Enter your Email information (if desired) and touch  
Done to complete the process.  
– or –  
Note: Access to this feature requires that you already be  
logged in to your Samsung account application. For  
Touch Skip to ignore this registration.  
The main Polaris Office screen displays.  
3. Follow the on-screen instructions to use Polaris Office.  
S Note  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
S Suggest.  
Use this application to create notes with productivity tools  
that turn handwriting into typed text and correct drawn  
shapes, lines, and formulas to make them perfect.  
2. Read the terms and conditions.  
3. Place a check mark in the Agree field then tap Agree  
4. Select an application from one of the available  
categories (Picks, Categories, Games, Friends, and  
Info.  
.
1. From the Home screen, tap  
2. Read the information at the Learn about application  
pop-up and tap OK  
3. Tap Tutorial from the main S Note screen to  
S Note  
.
.
5. Follow the on-screen download and installation  
instructions.  
learn more about the application, then follow the on-  
screen instructions.  
Applications  
198  
       
9. Read the information on the Help screen, then tap  
Finish  
S Voice  
.
With the S Voice application you can use your voice to  
perform operations that you would normally have to do by  
hand such as dialing a phone number, texting a message,  
playing music, etc.  
10. At the S Voice screen, say “Hi Galaxy” to wake up  
S voice.  
11. Speak into the phone and follow the on-screen  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
S Voice  
.
instructions.  
2. Read the Samsung Disclaimer then tap Confirm to  
continue.  
Settings  
This widget navigates to the sound and phone settings for  
your phone. It includes such settings as: display, security,  
memory, and any extra settings associated with your phone.  
3. Read the Vlingo Terms of Service then tap Agree to  
continue.  
4. Read the information on the About S Voice screen, then  
tap Next  
5. Read the information on the Say what you want screen,  
then tap Next  
6. Read the information on the Wake up S Voice screen,  
then tap Next  
7. Read the information on the Handwriting screen, then  
tap Next  
8. Read the information on the Edit what you said screen,  
then tap Next  
.
Talk  
.
Google Talk is a free Windows and web-based application for  
instant messaging offered by Google. Conversation logs are  
automatically saved to a Chats area in your Gmail account.  
This allows you to search a chat log and store them in your  
.
.
.
199  
         
4. Tap List  
to display a list of all your voice  
Video Player  
The Video Player application plays video files stored on your  
recordings. Tap a voice recording to play it.  
5. Press  
to display the following options:  
• Share via: allows you to share your recording using Bluetooth,  
Email, Gmail, Messaging, or Wi-Fi Direct.  
Voice Recorder  
• Delete: allows you to delete 1 or more voice recordings. Tap  
the recordings to delete and tap Delete  
The Voice Recorder allows you to record an audio file up to  
one minute long and then immediately share it using  
AllShare Play, Messaging, Gmail, or via Bluetooth. Recording  
time will vary based on the available memory within the  
phone.  
.
• Settings: the following settings are available:  
Storage: allows you to choose where your recordings will be  
saved. Select between Phone or memory card.  
Recording quality: allows you to set the recording quality to  
High or Normal.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Voice Recorder  
.
2. To start recording, tap Record  
microphone.  
and speak into the  
Limit for MMS: allows you to select On or Off. If you Limit for  
MMS by selecting On, you will be assured that the recording can  
be sent in a message.  
3. During the recording process you can either tap Stop  
to stop and save the recording or Pause  
temporarily halt the recording. After pausing, tap  
to  
Contextual filename: (requires GPS tagging) allows you to  
adjust the filename based on contextual information such as  
your current GPS location.  
Record  
to resume recording. Once the audio  
recording has stopped, the message is automatically  
saved. Tap Cancel  
to cancel the recording  
without saving.  
Applications  
200  
       
Default name: allows you to choose the name prefix for your  
recordings. For example, if your Default name is Voice, your  
recordings would be named Voice 001, Voice 002, Voice 003,  
etc.  
• Places: Displays places and businesses in your local area  
pertaining to your search.  
• More: After tapping More, sweep your screen to the left to see  
additional options such as News, Shopping, Videos, Blogs,  
Discussions, and Books.  
• End: allows you to close the application.  
Voice Search  
YouTube  
The Google Voice Search application allows you to search the  
web using only your voice.  
YouTube™ is a video sharing website on which users can  
upload and share videos. The site is used to display a wide  
variety of user-generated video content, including movie  
clips, TV clips, and music videos, as well as video content  
such as video blogging, informational shorts and other  
original videos.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Voice Search  
.
2. When the Google Voice Search screen displays, speak  
the word or words that you would like to search for on  
the internet.  
3. If the timer expires and the mic icon changes from red  
to gray, tap the mic icon and speak the word or words  
that you would like to search for on the internet.  
Results are displayed on your phone.  
Note: YouTube is a data-intensive feature. It is recommended  
that you upgrade to a large data plan to avoid additional  
data charges.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
YouTube  
.
4. The following options are available at the bottom of  
your screen:  
2. Tap the search field to search for specific videos,  
scroll down to browse through the main page  
thumbnails, or scroll to the bottom to explore additional  
options.  
• Web: After selecting a different option, tap Web to return to the  
original search results.  
• Images: Displays images for your search.  
201  
       
3. To view a video, tap an available preview thumbnail or  
SafeSearch filtering allows you to configure block settings for  
videos containing restricted content. This option blocks these  
videos from appearing within your search results. Choose from:  
Don’t filter, Moderate, or Strict blocking.  
tap the title link.  
To watch a high quality video:  
Press  
quality on mobile  
To configure YouTube Settings:  
Press and then tap Settings and configure the  
and then tap Settings  
General  
High  
• Preloading  
.
Preload subscriptions allows you to preload (or go get videos  
while on Wi-Fi and charging) your subscription videos.  
Preload watch later allows you to enable the preload function  
on selected videos so you can watch them later. Read the data  
usage information and tap OK to accept the terms.  
following parameters:  
• General  
High quality on mobile, when enabled, allows you to start all  
videos in high quality mode while you are connected to a mobile  
network.  
Note: Preloading YouTube videos will use some of your  
device’s storage space and may result in additional  
charges if your Wi-Fi plan is not unlimited.  
Caption font size allows you to set the font size used by on-  
screen captions. Choose from: Small, Medium, Large, or Huge.  
Uploads specifies network preferences for uploads.  
• About  
Help: provides answers to most YouTube questions.  
Feedback: allows you to provide user feedback to YouTube.  
Google Mobile Terms of Service: displays the Google Mobile  
Terms of Service.  
• Search  
Clear search history allows you to clear previous YouTube  
searches from showing up in the YouTube search box.  
YouTube Terms of Service: displays the YouTube terms of  
Service.  
Applications  
202  
         
Google Mobile Privacy Policy: displays the Google Mobile  
Privacy Policy.  
Note: The first time you use YP, you will need to download the  
updated application from the Play Store. When the Play  
Store page displays, tap Update or Install then follow the  
YouTube Privacy Policy: displays the YouTube Privacy Policy.  
Open source licenses: displays the Open source licenses  
App version: displays the software version for the current  
YouTube application.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
YPmobile  
.
Note: It is not necessary to sign in to the YouTube site to view  
content. However, if you wish to sign in to access  
additional options, access the page via the Web browser  
and tap Sign in at the top right corner, enter your  
YouTube or Google username and password, and tap  
2. Sign on to your Google account if you have not already  
3. Read the End-User License Agreement (EULA) and tap  
Accept to continue.  
Sign in  
.
4. Your location is found using GPS. Tap OK to allow  
YPmobile to use your current location.  
YPmobile  
5. Tap the Find a business nearby! field.  
The Yellowpages Mobile application provides quick and ready  
access to businesses, map locations, and storage of your  
favorite searches. This application allows you to tap into local  
businesses, locations, and events, connecting you to your  
search in real-time.  
6. Enter information in the What: and Near: fields and tap  
Search  
7. Results will be displayed.  
8. Tap to see the locations marked with pins on the  
map.  
.
203  
   
9. Pinch the map screen inwards to zoom out or pinch it  
outwards to zoom in.  
10. Tap a pin to read information about the location.  
11. Tap  
to display additional options.  
Applications  
204  
Section 11: Health and Safety Information  
with RF energy, these studies have failed to be replicated.  
This section outlines the safety precautions associated with  
using your phone. The terms “mobile device” or “cell phone”  
are used in this section to refer to your phone. Read this  
The majority of studies published have failed to show an  
association between exposure to radio frequency from a cell  
phone and health problems.  
information before using your mobile device  
.
The low levels of RF cell phones emit while in use are in the  
microwave frequency range. They also emit RF at  
substantially reduced time intervals when in the stand-by  
mode. Whereas high levels of RF can produce health effects  
(by heating tissue), exposure to low level RF that does not  
produce heating effects causes no known adverse health  
effects.  
Exposure to Radio Frequency (RF)  
Signals  
The U.S. Food and Drug Administration (FDA) has published  
information for consumers relating to Radio Frequency (RF)  
exposure from wireless phones. The FDA publication  
includes the following information:  
Do cell phones pose a health hazard?  
The biological effects of radio frequency energy should not  
be confused with the effects from other types of  
electromagnetic energy.  
Many people are concerned that cell phone radiation will  
cause cancer or other serious health hazards. The weight of  
scientific evidence has not linked cell phones with any health  
problems.  
Very high levels of electromagnetic energy, such as is found  
in X-rays and gamma rays, can ionize biological tissues.  
Ionization is a process where electrons are stripped away  
from their normal locations in atoms and molecules. It can  
permanently damage biological tissues including DNA, the  
genetic material.  
Cell phones emit low levels of Radio Frequency (RF) energy.  
Over the past 15 years, scientists have conducted hundreds  
of studies looking at the biological effects of the radio  
frequency energy emitted by cell phones. While some  
researchers have reported biological changes associated  
205  
         
The energy levels associated with radio frequency energy,  
including both radio waves and microwaves, are not great  
enough to cause ionization of atoms and molecules.  
Therefore, RF energy is a type of non-ionizing radiation.  
Other types of non-ionizing radiation include visible light,  
infrared radiation (heat), and other forms of electromagnetic  
radiation with relatively low frequencies.  
Interphone Study  
Interphone is a large international study designed to  
determine whether cell phones increase the risk of head and  
neck cancer. A report published in the International Journal  
of Epidemiology (June, 2010) compared cell phone usage for  
more than 5,000 people with brain tumors (glioma and  
meningioma) and a similar number of healthy controls.  
While RF energy does not ionize particles, large amounts can  
increase body temperatures and cause tissue damage. Two  
areas of the body, the eyes and the testes, are particularly  
vulnerable to RF heating because there is relatively little  
blood flow in them to carry away excess heat.  
Research Results to Date: Is there a connection  
between RF and certain health problems?  
The results of most studies conducted to date say no. In  
addition, attempts to replicate and confirm the few studies  
that have shown a connection have failed.  
Results of this study did NOT show that cell phones caused  
brain cancer. In this study, most people had no increased risk  
of brain cancer from using cell phones. For people with the  
heaviest use of cell phones (an average of more than ½ hour  
per day, every day, for over 10 years) the study suggested a  
slight increase in brain cancer. However, the authors  
determined that biases and errors prevented any conclusions  
being drawn from this data. Additional information about  
Interphone can be found at  
Interphone is the largest cell phone study to date, but it did  
not answer all questions about cell phone safety. Additional  
research is being conducted around the world, and the FDA  
continues to monitor developments in this field.  
The scientific community at large therefore believes that the  
weight of scientific evidence does not show an association  
between exposure to Radio Frequency (RF) from cell phones  
and adverse health outcomes. Still the scientific community  
has supported additional research to address gaps in  
knowledge. Some of these studies are described below.  
Health and Safety Information  
206  
International Cohort Study on Mobile Phone Users  
(COSMOS)  
Surveillance, Epidemiology, and End Results (SEER)  
Program of the National Cancer Institute  
The COSMOS study aims to conduct long-term health  
monitoring of a large group of people to determine if there  
are any health issues linked to long-term exposure to radio  
frequency energy from cell phone use. The COSMOS study  
will follow approximately 300,000 adult cell phone users in  
Europe for 20 to 30 years. Additional information about the  
COSMOS study can be found at  
The National Cancer Institute (NCI) actively follows cancer  
statistics in the United States to detect any change in rates of  
new cases for brain cancer. If cell phones play a role in risk  
for brain cancer, rates should go up, because heavy cell  
phone use has been common for quite some time in the U.S.  
Between 1987 and 2005, the overall age-adjusted incidence  
of brain cancer did not increase. Additional information about  
SEER can be found at  
.
.
Risk of Brain Cancer from Exposure to Radio  
Frequency Fields in Childhood and Adolescence  
(MOBI-KIDS)  
MOBI-KIDS is an international study investigating the  
relationship between exposure to radio frequency energy  
from communication technologies including cell phones and  
brain cancer in young people. This is an international  
multi-center study involving 14 European and non-European  
countries. Additional information about MOBI-KIDS can be  
found at  
Cell Phone Industry Actions  
Although the existing scientific data do not justify FDA  
regulatory actions, the FDA has urged the cell phone industry  
to take a number of steps, including the following:  
Support-needed research on possible biological effects of RF  
for the type of signal emitted by cell phones;  
Design cell phones in a way that minimizes any RF exposure to  
the user; and  
Cooperate in providing users of cell phones with the current  
information on cell phone use and human health concerns.  
http://www.creal.cat/programes-recerca/en_projectes-creal/  
view.php?ID=39.  
207  
The FDA also is working with voluntary standard-setting  
bodies such as the Institute of Electrical and Electronics  
Engineers (IEEE), the International Commission on  
Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection (ICNIRP), and others to  
assure that safety standards continue to adequately protect  
the public.  
Headsets can substantially reduce exposure because the  
phone is held away from the head in the user's hand or in  
approved body-worn accessories. Cell phones marketed in  
the U.S. are required to meet RF exposure compliance  
requirements when used against the head and against the  
body.  
Because there are no known risks from exposure to RF  
emissions from cell phones, there is no reason to believe that  
hands-free kits reduce risks. Hands-free kits can be used for  
convenience and comfort. They are also required by law in  
many states if you want to use your phone while driving.  
Cell Phone Accessories that Claim to Shield the Head  
from RF Radiation  
Because there are no known risks from exposure to RF  
emissions from cell phones, there is no reason to believe that  
accessories which claim to shield the head from those  
emissions reduce risks. Some products that claim to shield  
the user from RF absorption use special phone cases, while  
others involve nothing more than a metallic accessory  
attached to the phone.  
Reducing Exposure: Hands-Free Kits and Other  
Accessories  
Steps to Reduce Exposure to Radio Frequency Energy  
If there is a risk from being exposed to radio frequency  
energy (RF) from cell phones - and at this point we do not  
know that there is - it is probably very small. But, if you are  
concerned about avoiding even potential risks, you can take  
a few simple steps to minimize your RF exposure.  
Reduce the amount of time spent using your cell phone;  
Use speaker mode or a headset to place more distance between  
your head and the cell phone.  
Hands-Free Kits  
Hands-free kits may include audio or Bluetooth® headsets  
and various types of body-worn accessories such as  
belt-clips and holsters. Combinations of these can be used to  
reduce RF energy absorption from cell phones.  
Health and Safety Information  
208  
 
Studies have shown that these products generally do not  
work as advertised. Unlike “hands-free” kits, these so-called  
“shields” may interfere with proper operation of the phone.  
The phone may be forced to boost its power to compensate,  
leading to an increase in RF absorption.  
Additional information on the safety of RF exposures from  
various sources can be obtained from the following  
organizations (updated 10/1/2010):  
FCC RF Safety Program:  
Children and Cell Phones  
Environmental Protection Agency (EPA):  
Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA):  
(Note: This web address is case sensitive.)  
National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH):  
The scientific evidence does not show a danger to any users  
of cell phones from RF exposure, including children and  
teenagers. The steps adults can take to reduce RF exposure  
apply to children and teenagers as well.  
Reduce the amount of time spent on the cell phone;  
Use speaker mode or a headset to place more distance between  
the head and the cell phone.  
World Health Organization (WHO):  
Some groups sponsored by other national governments have  
advised that children be discouraged from using cell phones  
at all. For example, The Stewart Report from the United  
Kingdom made such a recommendation in December 2000.  
In this report, a group of independent experts noted that no  
evidence exists that using a cell phone causes brain tumors  
or other ill effects. Their recommendation to limit cell phone  
use by children was strictly precautionary; it was not based  
on scientific evidence that any health hazard exists.  
International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection:  
Health Protection Agency:  
209  
 
US Food and Drug Administration:  
expressed in units of watts per kilogram (W/kg). The FCC  
requires wireless phones to comply with a safety limit of 1.6  
watts per kilogram (1.6 W/kg).  
http://www.fda.gov/Radiation-EmittingProducts/  
RadiationEmittingProductsandProcedures/  
The FCC SAR limit incorporates a substantial margin of safety  
to give additional protection to the public and to account for  
any variations in measurements.  
Specific Absorption Rate (SAR)  
Certification Information  
Your wireless phone is a radio transmitter and receiver. It is  
designed and manufactured not to exceed the exposure  
limits for Radio Frequency (RF) energy set by the Federal  
Communications Commission (FCC) of the U.S. Government.  
SAR tests are conducted using standard operating positions  
accepted by the FCC with the phone transmitting at its  
highest certified power level in all tested frequency bands.  
Although the SAR is determined at the highest certified  
power level, the actual SAR level of the phone while  
These FCC RF exposure limits are derived from the  
recommendations of two expert organizations: the National  
Council on Radiation Protection and Measurement (NCRP)  
and the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers  
(IEEE). In both cases, the recommendations were developed  
by scientific and engineering experts drawn from industry,  
government, and academia after extensive reviews of the  
scientific literature related to the biological effects of RF  
energy.  
operating can be well below the maximum reported value.  
This is because the phone is designed to operate at multiple  
power levels so as to use only the power required to reach  
the network. In general, the closer you are to a wireless base  
station antenna, the lower the power output of the phone.  
Before a new model phone is available for sale to the public,  
it must be tested and certified to the FCC that it does not  
exceed the SAR limit established by the FCC. Tests for each  
model phone are performed in positions and locations (e.g. at  
the ear and worn on the body) as required by the FCC. For  
body-worn operation, this phone has been tested and meets  
The RF exposure limit set by the FCC for wireless mobile  
phones employs a unit of measurement known as the  
Specific Absorption Rate (SAR). The SAR is a measure of the  
rate of absorption of RF energy by the human body  
Health and Safety Information  
210  
   
FCC RF exposure guidelines when used with an accessory  
that contains no metal and that positions the mobile device a  
minimum of 1.0 cm from the body.  
FCC ID number which is usually printed somewhere on the  
case of the phone. Sometimes it may be necessary to  
remove the battery pack to find the number. Once you have  
the FCC ID number for a particular phone, follow the  
instructions on the website and it should provide values for  
typical or maximum SAR for a particular phone. Additional  
SAR information can also be obtained at  
Use of other accessories may not ensure compliance with  
FCC RF exposure guidelines. The FCC has granted an  
Equipment Authorization for this mobile phone with all  
reported SAR levels evaluated as in compliance with the FCC  
RF exposure guidelines. The maximum SAR values for this  
model phone as reported to the FCC are:  
.
FCC Part 15 Information to User  
Pursuant to part 15.21 of the FCC Rules, you are cautioned  
that changes or modifications not expressly approved by  
Samsung could void your authority to operate the device.  
Head: 0.32 W/kg.  
Body-worn: 1.44 W/kg.  
FCC Radio Frequency Emission  
This phone meets the FCC Radio Frequency Emission  
Guidelines.  
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules.  
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This  
device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this  
device must accept any interference received, including  
interference that may cause undesired operation.  
FCC ID: A3LSGHI317  
More information on the phone's SAR can be found from the  
following FCC website:  
Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply  
with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part  
15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide  
reasonable protection against harmful interference in a  
residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and  
SAR information on this and other model phones can be  
accessed online on the FCC's website through http://  
transition.fcc.gov/oet/rfsafety/sar.html. To find information that  
pertains to a particular model phone, this site uses the phone  
211  
 
can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and  
used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful  
interference to radio communications.  
confident that the secondary task will not interfere with their  
primary responsibility. Do not engage in any activity while  
driving a moving vehicle which may cause you to take your  
eyes off the road or become so absorbed in the activity that  
your ability to concentrate on the act of driving becomes  
impaired. Samsung is committed to promoting responsible  
driving and giving drivers the tools they need to understand  
and address distractions.  
However, there is no guarantee that interference will not  
occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does  
cause harmful interference to radio or television reception,  
which can be determined by turning the equipment off and  
on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference  
by one or more of the following measures:  
Check the laws and regulations on the use of mobile devices  
and their accessories in the areas where you drive. Always  
obey them. The use of these devices may be prohibited or  
restricted in certain areas. For example, only hands-free use  
may be permitted in certain areas.  
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.  
Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.  
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from  
that to which the receiver is connected.  
Before answering calls, consider your circumstances. Let the  
call go to voicemail when driving conditions require.  
Remember, driving comes first, not the call!  
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.  
Smart Practices While Driving  
On the Road - Off the Phone  
If you consider a call necessary and appropriate, follow these  
tips:  
The primary responsibility of every driver is the safe  
operation of his or her vehicle.  
Use a hands-free device;  
Responsible drivers understand that no secondary task  
should be performed while driving whether it be eating,  
drinking, talking to passengers, or talking on a mobile phone  
- unless the driver has assessed the driving conditions and is  
Secure your phone within easy reach;  
Place calls when you are not moving;  
Plan calls when your car will be stationary;  
Do not engage in stressful or emotional conversations;  
Health and Safety Information  
212  
   
Let the person with whom you are speaking know that you are  
driving and will suspend the call if necessary;  
Battery Use and Safety  
Important! Handle and store batteries properly to avoid injury or  
damage. Most battery issues arise from improper  
handling of batteries and, particularly, from the  
continued use of damaged batteries.  
Do not take notes or look up phone numbers while driving;  
Notice regarding legal restrictions on mounting this device in  
an automobile:  
Laws in some states may prohibit mounting this device on or  
near the windshield of an automobile. In other states, the law  
may permit mounting this device only in specific locations in  
the automobile. Be sure to consult the state and local laws or  
ordinances where you drive before mounting this device in  
an automobile. Failure to comply with these restrictions could  
result in fines, penalties, or other damages.  
Do not disassemble, crush, puncture, shred, or otherwise  
attempt to change the form of your battery. Do not put a high  
degree of pressure on the battery. This can cause leakage or an  
internal short-circuit, resulting in overheating.  
Do not let the phone or battery come in contact with liquids.  
Liquids can get into the phone's circuits, leading to corrosion.  
Even when the phone appears to be dry and appears to operate  
normally, the circuitry could slowly corrode and pose a safety  
hazard. If the phone and/or battery get wet, have them checked  
by your service provider or contact Samsung, even if they appear  
to be working properly.  
Never mount this device in a manner that will obstruct the  
driver's clear view of the street and traffic.  
Never use wireless data services such as text messaging, Web  
browsing, or e-mail while operating a vehicle.  
Never watch videos, such as a movie or clip, or play video  
games while operating a vehicle.  
For more information, go to http://www.ctia.org  
.
213  
   
Do not place your battery in or near a heat source. Excessive  
heating can damage the phone or the battery and could cause the  
phone or the battery to explode. Do not dry a wet or damp battery  
with an appliance or heat source such as a microwave oven, hair  
dryer, iron, or radiator. Avoid leaving your phone in your car in  
high temperatures.  
Do not allow the battery to touch metal objects. Accidental  
short-circuiting can occur when a metallic object (coin, key,  
jewelry, clip, or pen) causes a direct connection between the +  
and - terminals of the battery (metal strips on the battery), for  
example when you carry a spare battery in a pocket or bag.  
Short-circuiting the terminals may damage the battery or the  
object causing the short-circuiting.  
Do not dispose of the phone or the battery in a fire. The phone  
or the battery may explode when overheated.  
Important! Use only Samsung-approved batteries, and  
recharge your battery only with  
Do not handle a damaged or leaking battery. Do not let leaking  
battery fluid come in contact with your eyes, skin or clothing. For  
safe disposal options, contact your nearest Samsung-authorized  
service center.  
Samsung-approved chargers which are  
specifically designed for your phone.  
Avoid dropping the cell phone. Dropping the phone or the  
battery, especially on a hard surface, can potentially cause  
damage to the phone and battery. If you suspect damage to the  
phone or battery, take it to a service center for inspection.  
WARNING!  
Use of a non-Samsung-approved battery or charger may  
present a risk of fire, explosion, leakage, or other hazard  
Samsung's warranty does not cover damage to the phone  
caused by non-Samsung-approved batteries and/or  
chargers.  
.
Never use any charger or battery that is damaged in any way  
.
Health and Safety Information  
214  
Do not use incompatible cell phone batteries and chargers  
Some websites and second-hand dealers not associated with  
reputable manufacturers and carriers, might be selling  
incompatible or even counterfeit batteries and chargers.  
Consumers should purchase manufacturer or  
.
Recycling programs for your mobile device, batteries, and  
accessories may not be available in your area.  
We've made it easy for you to recycle your old Samsung  
mobile device by working with respected take-back  
companies in every state in the country.  
Drop It Off  
carrier-recommended products and accessories. If unsure about  
whether a replacement battery or charger is compatible, contact  
the manufacturer of the battery or charger.  
You can drop off your Samsung-branded mobile device  
and batteries for recycling at one of our numerous  
Samsung Recycling Direct (SM) locations. A list of these  
locations may be found at:  
.
Misuse or use of incompatible phones, batteries, and  
charging devices could result in damage to the equipment  
and a possible risk of fire, explosion, or leakage, leading to  
serious injuries, damages to your phone, or other serious  
hazard  
.
Samsung-branded devices and batteries will be accepted  
at these locations for no fee.  
Samsung Mobile Products and  
Recycling  
Samsung cares for the environment and encourages its  
customers to recycle Samsung mobile devices and genuine  
Samsung accessories.  
Consumers may also recycle their used mobile device or  
batteries at many retail or carrier-provided locations  
where mobile devices and batteries are sold. Additional  
information regarding specific locations may be found at:  
Proper disposal of your mobile device and its battery is not  
only important for safety, it benefits the environment.  
Batteries must be recycled or disposed of properly.  
.
215  
   
Mail It In  
Warning! Never dispose of batteries in a fire because they may  
The Samsung Mobile Take-Back Program will provide  
Samsung customers with a free recycling mailing label.  
Just go to  
A_recyle_your_phone_page and follow the instructions to  
print out a free pre-paid postage label and then send your  
old mobile device or battery to the address listed, via U.S.  
Mail, for recycling.  
explode.  
UL Certified Travel Charger  
The Travel Charger for this phone has met applicable UL  
safety requirements. Please adhere to the following safety  
instructions per UL guidelines:  
FAILURE TO FOLLOW THE INSTRUCTIONS OUTLINED MAY  
LEAD TO SERIOUS PERSONAL INJURY AND POSSIBLE  
PROPERTY DAMAGE.  
Dispose of unwanted electronics through an approved  
recycler.  
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS - SAVE THESE  
INSTRUCTIONS.  
To find the nearest recycling location, go to our website:  
Or call, (877) 278-0799.  
DANGER - TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR  
ELECTRIC SHOCK, CAREFULLY FOLLOW THESE  
INSTRUCTIONS.  
Follow local regulations regarding disposal of mobile  
devices and batteries  
Dispose of your mobile device and batteries in accordance  
with local regulations. In some areas, the disposal of these  
items in household or business trash may be prohibited. Help  
us protect the environment - recycle!  
FOR CONNECTION TO A SUPPLY NOT IN NORTH  
AMERICA, USE AN ATTACHMENT PLUG ADAPTOR  
OF THE PROPER CONFIGURATION FOR THE  
POWER OUTLET.  
Health and Safety Information  
216  
   
WARRANTY DISCLAIMER: PROPER USE OF A  
TOUCH-SCREEN MOBILE DEVICE  
THIS POWER UNIT IS INTENDED TO BE  
CORRECTLY ORIENTED IN A VERTICAL OR  
HORIZONTAL OR FLOOR MOUNT POSITION.  
If your mobile device has a touch-screen display,  
please note that a touch-screen responds best to a  
light touch from the pad of your finger or a non-metallic  
stylus. Using excessive force or a metallic object when  
pressing on the touch-screen may damage the  
tempered glass surface and void the warranty. For  
more information, please refer to the “Standard  
Limited Warranty”.  
Display / Touch-Screen  
Please note the following information when using your  
mobile device:  
WARNING REGARDING DISPLAY  
The display on your mobile device is made of glass or  
acrylic and could break if your mobile device is  
dropped or if it receives significant impact. Do not use  
if screen is broken or cracked as this could cause  
injury to you.  
GPS  
Certain Samsung mobile devices can use a Global Positioning  
System (GPS) signal for location based applications. A GPS  
uses satellites controlled by the U.S. Government that are  
subject to changes implemented in accordance with the  
Department of Defense policy and the 2008 Federal Radio  
navigation Plan (FRP). Changes may affect the performance  
of location-based technology on your mobile device.  
Even with GPS, when you make an emergency call:  
Always tell the emergency responder your location to the best of  
your ability; and  
217  
       
Remain on the mobile device for as long as the emergency  
responder instructs you.  
make or receive any calls, the mobile device must be  
switched on and in a service area with adequate signal  
strength.  
Navigation  
Emergency calls may not be possible on all wireless mobile  
device networks or when certain network services and/or  
mobile device features are in use. Check with local service  
providers.  
Maps, directions, and other navigation-data, including data  
relating to your current location, may contain inaccurate or  
incomplete data, and circumstances can and do change over  
time. In some areas, complete information may not be  
available. Therefore, you should always visually confirm that  
the navigational instructions are consistent with what you see  
before following them. All users should pay attention to road  
conditions, closures, traffic, and all other factors that may  
impact safe driving or walking. Always obey posted road signs.  
To make an emergency call:  
1. If the phone is not on, switch it on.  
2. From the Home screen, tap  
. The dialer is  
displayed.  
3. Key in the emergency number for your present location  
(for example, 911 or other official emergency number).  
Emergency numbers vary by location.  
Emergency Calls  
This mobile device, like any wireless mobile device, operates  
using radio signals, wireless and landline networks, as well  
as user-programmed functions, which cannot guarantee  
connection in all conditions, areas, or circumstances.  
4. Tap the  
key.  
Care and Maintenance  
Therefore, you should never rely solely on any wireless  
mobile device for essential communications (medical  
emergencies, for example). Before traveling in remote or  
underdeveloped areas, plan an alternate method of  
contacting emergency services personnel. Remember, to  
Your mobile device is a product of superior design and  
craftsmanship and should be treated with care. The  
suggestions below will help you fulfill any warranty  
obligations and allow you to enjoy this product for many  
years:  
Health and Safety Information  
218  
       
Keep your Samsung Mobile Device away from:  
Liquids of any kind  
cloth slightly dampened in a mild soap-and-water  
solution.  
Shock or vibration  
Keep the mobile device dry. Precipitation, humidity, and  
liquids contain minerals that will corrode electronic  
circuits. If the mobile device does get wet, do not  
accelerate drying with the use of an oven, microwave, or  
dryer, because this may damage the mobile device and  
could cause a fire or explosion.  
Do not drop, knock, or shake the mobile device. Rough  
handling can break internal circuit boards.  
Paint  
Do not paint the mobile device. Paint can clog the  
device’s moving parts or ventilation openings and prevent  
proper operation.  
Do not use the mobile device with a wet hand. Doing so  
may cause an electric shock to you or damage to the  
mobile device.  
Responsible Listening  
Extreme heat or cold  
Caution! Avoid potential hearing loss  
.
Avoid temperatures below 0°C / 32°F or above 45°C /  
113°F.  
Damage to hearing occurs when a person is exposed to loud  
sounds over time. The risk of hearing loss increases as  
sound is played louder and for longer durations. Prolonged  
exposure to loud sounds (including music) is the most  
common cause of preventable hearing loss. Some scientific  
research suggests that using portable audio devices, such as  
portable music players and cell phones, at high volume  
settings for long durations may lead to permanent  
noise-induced hearing loss.  
Microwaves  
Do not try to dry your mobile device in a microwave oven.  
Doing so may cause a fire or explosion.  
Dust and dirt  
Do not expose your mobile device to dust, dirt, or sand.  
Cleaning solutions  
Do not use harsh chemicals, cleaning solvents, or strong  
detergents to clean the mobile device. Wipe it with a soft  
219  
   
This includes the use of headphones (including headsets,  
earbuds, and Bluetooth® or other wireless devices).  
Exposure to very loud sound has also been associated in  
some studies with tinnitus (a ringing in the ear),  
hypersensitivity to sound, and distorted hearing. Individual  
susceptibility to noise-induced hearing loss and potential  
hearing problem varies. Additionally, the amount of sound  
produced by a portable audio device varies depending on the  
nature of the sound, the device settings, and the headphones  
that are used. As a result, there is no single volume setting  
that is appropriate for everyone or for every combination of  
sound, settings, and equipment.  
When using headphones, turn the volume down if you cannot  
hear the people speaking near you or if the person sitting next to  
you can hear what you are listening to.  
Do not turn the volume up to block out noisy surroundings. If you  
choose to listen to your portable device in a noisy environment,  
use noise-cancelling headphones to block out background  
environmental noise. By blocking background environment noise,  
noise cancelling headphones should allow you to hear the music  
at lower volumes than when using earbuds.  
Limit the amount of time you listen. As the volume increases, less  
time is required before you hearing could be affected.  
Avoid using headphones after exposure to extremely loud noises,  
such as rock concerts, that might cause temporary hearing loss.  
Temporary hearing loss might cause unsafe volumes to sound  
normal.  
You should follow some common sense recommendations  
when using any portable audio device:  
Always turn the volume down before plugging the earphones into  
an audio source.  
Set the volume in a quiet environment and select the lowest  
volume at which you can hear adequately.  
Be aware that you can adapt to higher volume settings over time,  
not realizing that the higher volume may be harmful to your  
hearing.  
Do not listen at any volume that causes you discomfort. If you  
experience ringing in your ears, hear muffled speech, or  
experience any temporary hearing difficulty after listening to your  
portable audio device, discontinue use and consult your doctor.  
You can obtain additional information on this subject from the  
following sources:  
Health and Safety Information  
220  
National Institute for Occupational Safety  
and Health (NIOSH)  
American Academy of Audiology  
11730 Plaza American Drive, Suite 300  
Reston, VA 20190  
395 E Street, S.W., Suite 9200  
Patriots Plaza Building  
Washington, DC 20201  
Voice: (800) 222-2336  
Voice: 1-800-35-NIOSH  
(1-800-356-4674)  
1-800-CDC-INFO (1-800-232-4636)  
Outside the U.S. 513-533-8328  
Internet:  
National Institute on Deafness and Other  
Communication Disorders  
Internet:  
National Institutes of Health  
31 Center Drive, MSC 2320  
Bethesda, MD 20892-2320  
http://www.cdc.gov/niosh/topics/noise/  
default.html  
1-888-232-6348 TTY  
Operating Environment  
Internet:  
Remember to follow any special regulations in force in any  
area, and always switch your mobile device off whenever it is  
forbidden to use it, or when it may cause interference or  
danger. When connecting the mobile device or any accessory  
to another device, read its user's guide for detailed safety  
instructions. Do not connect incompatible products.  
221  
   
Using Your Mobile Device Near Other Electronic  
Devices  
Most modern electronic equipment is shielded from Radio  
Frequency (RF) signals. However, certain electronic  
equipment may not be shielded against the RF signals from  
your wireless mobile device. Consult the manufacturer to  
discuss alternatives.  
Should read and follow the directions from the manufacturer of  
your implantable medical device. If you have any questions about  
using your wireless mobile device with an implantable medical  
device, consult your health care provider.  
For more information see: http://www.fcc.gov/oet/rfsafety/rf-  
.
Other Medical Devices  
Implantable Medical Devices  
If you use any other personal medical devices, consult the  
manufacturer of your device to determine if it is adequately  
shielded from external RF energy. Your physician may be able  
to assist you in obtaining this information. Switch your  
mobile device off in health care facilities when any  
regulations posted in these areas instruct you to do so.  
Hospitals or health care facilities may be using equipment  
that could be sensitive to external RF energy.  
A minimum separation of six (6) inches should be maintained  
between a handheld wireless mobile device and an  
implantable medical device, such as a pacemaker or  
implantable cardioverter defibrillator, to avoid potential  
interference with the device.  
Persons who have such devices:  
Should ALWAYS keep the mobile device more than six (6) inches  
from their implantable medical device when the mobile device is  
turned ON;  
Vehicles  
RF signals may affect improperly installed or inadequately  
shielded electronic systems in motor vehicles. Check with  
the manufacturer or its representative regarding your vehicle  
before using your mobile device in a motor vehicle. You  
should also consult the manufacturer of any equipment that  
has been added to your vehicle.  
Should not carry the mobile device in a breast pocket;  
Should use the ear opposite the implantable medical device to  
minimize the potential for interference;  
Should turn the mobile device OFF immediately if there is any  
reason to suspect that interference is taking place;  
Health and Safety Information  
222  
Posted Facilities  
When your Device is Wet  
Switch your mobile device off in any facility where posted  
notices require you to do so.  
Do not turn on your device if it is wet. If your device is  
already on, turn it off and remove the battery immediately (if  
the device will not turn off or you cannot remove the battery,  
leave it as-is). Then, dry the device with a towel and take it  
to a service center.  
Potentially Explosive Environments  
Switch your mobile device off when in any area with a  
potentially explosive atmosphere and obey all signs and  
instructions. Sparks in such areas could cause an explosion  
or fire resulting in bodily injury or even death. Users are  
advised to switch the mobile device off while at a refueling  
point (service station).  
FCC Hearing Aid Compatibility (HAC)  
Regulations for Wireless Devices  
The U.S. Federal Communications Commission (FCC) has  
established requirements for digital wireless mobile devices  
to be compatible with hearing aids and other assistive  
hearing devices.  
Users are reminded of the need to observe restrictions on the  
use of radio equipment in fuel depots (fuel storage and  
distribution areas), chemical plants, or where blasting  
operations are in progress. Areas with a potentially explosive  
atmosphere are often, but not always, clearly marked. They  
include below deck on boats, chemical transfer or storage  
facilities, vehicles using liquefied petroleum gas (such as  
propane or butane), areas where the air contains chemicals  
or particles, such as grain, dust, or metal powders, and any  
other area where you would normally be advised to turn off  
your vehicle engine.  
When individuals employing some assistive hearing devices  
(hearing aids and cochlear implants) use wireless mobile  
devices, they may detect a buzzing, humming, or whining  
noise. Some hearing devices are more immune than others  
to this interference noise, and mobile devices also vary in the  
amount of interference they generate.  
The wireless telephone industry has developed a rating  
system for wireless mobile devices to assist hearing device  
users find mobile devices that may be compatible with their  
223  
   
hearing devices. Not all mobile devices have been rated.  
Mobile devices that are rated have the rating on their box or  
a label located on the box.  
Hearing devices may also be rated. Your hearing aid  
manufacturer or hearing health professional may help you  
find this rating. Higher ratings mean that the hearing device  
is relatively immune to interference noise.  
The ratings are not guarantees. Results will vary depending  
on the user's hearing device and hearing loss. If your hearing  
device happens to be vulnerable to interference, you may not  
be able to use a rated mobile device successfully. Trying out  
the mobile device with your hearing device is the best way to  
evaluate it for your personal needs.  
Under the current industry standard, American National  
Standards Institute (ANSI) C63.19, the hearing aid and  
wireless mobile device rating values are added together to  
indicate how usable they are together. For example, if a  
hearing aid meets the M2 level rating and the wireless  
mobile device meets the M3 level rating, the sum of the two  
values equals M5.  
M-Ratings: Wireless mobile devices rated M3 or M4 meet  
FCC requirements and are likely to generate less interference  
to hearing devices than mobile devices that are not labeled.  
M4 is the better/higher of the two ratings. M-ratings refer to  
enabling acoustic coupling with hearing aids that do not  
operate in telecoil mode.  
Under the standard, this should provide the hearing aid user  
with normal use while using the hearing aid with the  
particular wireless mobile device. A sum of 6 or more would  
indicate excellent performance.  
T-Ratings: Mobile devices rated T3 or T4 meet FCC  
requirements and are likely to generate less interference to  
hearing devices than mobile devices that are not labeled. T4  
is the better/higher of the two ratings. T-ratings refer to  
enabling inductive coupling with hearing aids operating in  
telecoil mode.  
However, these are not guarantees that all users will be  
satisfied. T ratings work similarly.  
Health and Safety Information  
224  
It is important to try the different features of this phone  
thoroughly and in different locations, using your hearing aid  
or cochlear implant, to determine if you hear any interfering  
noise. Consult your service provider or the manufacturer of  
this phone for information on hearing aid compatibility. If you  
have questions about return or exchange policies, consult  
your service provider or phone retailer.  
M3  
+
M2  
=
5
Restricting Children's Access to Your  
Mobile Device  
Your mobile device is not a toy. Do not allow children to play  
with it because they could hurt themselves and others,  
damage the mobile device, or make calls that increase your  
mobile device bill.  
T3  
+
T2  
=
5
The HAC rating and measurement procedure are described in  
the American National Standards Institute (ANSI) C63.19  
standard.  
Keep the mobile device and all its parts and accessories out  
of the reach of small children.  
FCC Notice and Cautions  
HAC for Newer Technologies  
FCC Notice  
This phone has been tested and rated for use with hearing  
aids for some of the wireless technologies that it uses.  
However, there may be some newer wireless technologies  
used in this phone that have not been tested yet for use with  
hearing aids.  
The mobile device may cause TV or radio interference if used  
in close proximity to receiving equipment. The FCC can  
require you to stop using the mobile device if such  
interference cannot be eliminated. Vehicles using liquefied  
petroleum gas (such as propane or butane) must comply with  
225  
       
the National Fire Protection Standard (NFPA-58). For a copy  
of this standard, contact the National Fire Protection  
Association.  
Check regularly that all wireless mobile device equipment in your  
vehicle is mounted and operating properly.  
When using a headset in dry environments, static electricity can  
build up in the headset and cause a small quick static electrical  
shock. To minimize the risk of electrostatic discharge from the  
headset avoid using the headset in extremely dry environments or  
touch a grounded unpainted metal object to discharge static  
electricity before inserting the headset.  
Cautions  
Any changes or modifications to your mobile device not  
expressly approved in this document could void your  
warranty for this equipment and void your authority to  
operate this equipment. Only use approved batteries,  
antennas, and chargers. The use of any unauthorized  
accessories may be dangerous and void the mobile device  
warranty if said accessories cause damage or a defect to the  
mobile device.  
Do not store or carry flammable liquids, gases, or explosive  
materials in the same compartment as the mobile device, its  
parts, or accessories.  
For vehicles equipped with an air bag, remember that an air bag  
inflates with great force. Do not place objects, including installed  
or portable wireless equipment near or in the area over the air  
bag or in the air bag deployment area. If wireless equipment is  
improperly installed and the air bag inflates, serious injury could  
result.  
Although your mobile device is quite sturdy, it is a complex  
piece of equipment and can be broken. Avoid dropping,  
hitting, bending, or sitting on it.  
Other Important Safety Information  
Only qualified personnel should service the mobile device or  
install the mobile device in a vehicle. Faulty installation or service  
may be dangerous and may invalidate any warranty applicable to  
the device.  
Switch your mobile device off before boarding an aircraft. The use  
of wireless mobile devices in aircraft is illegal and may be  
dangerous to the aircraft's operation. Check with appropriate  
authorities before using any function of a mobile device while on  
an aircraft.  
Ensure that any mobile devices or related equipment installed in  
your vehicle are securely mounted.  
Health and Safety Information  
226  
   
Failure to observe these instructions may lead to the suspension  
or denial of cell phone services to the offender, or legal action, or  
both.  
While using your device, leave some lights on in the room and do  
not hold the screen too close to your eyes.  
Seizures or blackouts can occur when you are exposed to flashing  
lights while watching videos or playing games for extended  
periods. If you feel any discomfort, stop using the device  
immediately.  
Reduce risk of repetitive motion injuries. When you repetitively  
perform actions, such as pressing keys, drawing characters on a  
touch screen with your fingers, or playing games, you may  
experience occasional discomfort in your hands, neck, shoulders,  
or other parts of your body. When using your device for extended  
periods, hold the device with a relaxed grip, press the keys lightly,  
and take frequent breaks. If you continue to have discomfort  
during or after such use, stop use and see a physician.  
If your device has a camera flash or light, do not use the flash or  
light close to the eyes of people or pets. [122011]  
227  
Section 12: Warranty Information  
This Limited Warranty does not cover: (a) defects or damage  
resulting from accident, misuse, abnormal use, abnormal  
conditions, improper storage, exposure to liquid, moisture,  
dampness, sand or dirt, neglect, or unusual physical,  
electrical or electromechanical stress; (b) scratches, dents  
and cosmetic damage, unless caused by SAMSUNG;  
(c) defects or damage resulting from excessive force or use  
of a metallic object when pressing on a touch screen;  
(d) equipment that has the serial number or the  
Standard Limited Warranty  
What is covered and for how long?  
SAMSUNG TELECOMMUNICATIONS AMERICA, LLC  
(“SAMSUNG”) warrants that SAMSUNG’s handsets and  
accessories (“Products”) are free from defects in material  
and workmanship under normal use and service for the  
period commencing upon the date of purchase by the first  
consumer purchaser and continuing for the following  
specified period of time after that date:  
enhancement data code removed, defaced, damaged,  
altered or made illegible; (e) ordinary wear and tear;  
(f) defects or damage resulting from the use of Product in  
conjunction or connection with accessories, products, or  
ancillary/peripheral equipment not furnished or approved by  
SAMSUNG; (g) defects or damage resulting from improper  
testing, operation, maintenance, installation, service, or  
adjustment not furnished or approved by SAMSUNG;  
(h) defects or damage resulting from external causes such as  
collision with an object, fire, flooding, dirt, windstorm,  
lightning, earthquake, exposure to weather conditions, theft,  
blown fuse, or improper use of any electrical source;  
(i) defects or damage resulting from cellular signal reception  
Phone  
1 Year  
Batteries  
1 Year  
Case/Pouch/Holster  
90 Days  
Other Phone Accessories 1 Year  
What is not covered?  
This Limited Warranty is conditioned upon proper use of the  
Product.  
Warranty Information  
228  
       
or transmission, or viruses or other software problems  
introduced into the Product; or (j) Product used or purchased  
outside the United States. This Limited Warranty covers  
batteries only if battery capacity falls below 80% of rated  
capacity or the battery leaks, and this Limited Warranty does  
not cover any battery if (i) the battery has been charged by a  
battery charger not specified or approved by SAMSUNG for  
charging the battery; (ii) any of the seals on the battery are  
broken or show evidence of tampering; or (iii) the battery has  
been used in equipment other than the SAMSUNG phone for  
which it is specified.  
remainder of the original Limited Warranty on the original  
Product or for ninety (90) days, whichever is longer. All  
replaced Products, parts, components, boards and  
equipment shall become the property of SAMSUNG. Except to  
any extent expressly allowed by applicable law, transfer or  
assignment of this Limited Warranty is prohibited.  
What must you do to obtain warranty service?  
To obtain service under this Limited Warranty, you must  
return the Product to an authorized phone service facility in  
an adequate container for shipping, accompanied by the  
sales receipt or comparable proof of sale showing the  
original date of purchase, the serial number of the Product  
and the seller’s name and address.  
What are SAMSUNG’s obligations?  
During the applicable warranty period, provided the Product  
is returned in accordance with the terms of this Limited  
Warranty, SAMSUNG will repair or replace the Product, at  
SAMSUNG’s sole option, without charge. SAMSUNG may, at  
SAMSUNG’s sole option, use rebuilt, reconditioned, or new  
parts or components when repairing any Product, or may  
replace the Product with a rebuilt, reconditioned or new  
Product.  
To obtain assistance on where to deliver the Product, please  
call SAMSUNG Customer Care at 1-888-987-4357. If  
SAMSUNG determines that any Product is not covered by this  
Limited Warranty, you must pay all parts, shipping, and labor  
charges for the repair or return of such Product.  
You should keep a separate backup copy of any contents of  
the Product before delivering the Product to SAMSUNG for  
warranty service, as some or all of the contents may be  
deleted or reformatted during the course of warranty service.  
Repaired/replaced cases, pouches and holsters will be  
warranted for a period of ninety (90) days. All other repaired/  
replaced Products will be warranted for a period equal to the  
229  
What are the limits on SAMSUNG’s liability?  
OR SUITABILITY OF ANY THIRD-PARTY SOFTWARE OR  
EQUIPMENT USED IN CONJUNCTION WITH THE PRODUCT, OR  
THE ABILITY TO INTEGRATE ANY SUCH SOFTWARE OR  
EQUIPMENT WITH THE PRODUCT, WHETHER SUCH  
THIRD-PARTY SOFTWARE OR EQUIPMENT IS INCLUDED WITH  
THE PRODUCT DISTRIBUTED BY SAMSUNG OR OTHERWISE.  
RESPONSIBILITY FOR THE QUALITY, CAPABILITIES,  
OPERATIONS, PERFORMANCE AND SUITABILITY OF ANY  
SUCH THIRD-PARTY SOFTWARE OR EQUIPMENT RESTS  
SOLELY WITH THE USER AND THE DIRECT VENDOR, OWNER  
OR SUPPLIER OF SUCH THIRD-PARTY SOFTWARE OR  
EQUIPMENT.  
THIS LIMITED WARRANTY SETS OUT THE FULL EXTENT OF  
SAMSUNG’S RESPONSIBILITIES, AND THE EXCLUSIVE  
REMEDY REGARDING THE PRODUCTS.  
ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING WITHOUT  
LIMITATION, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY  
AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ARE LIMITED TO  
THE DURATION OF THIS LIMITED WARRANTY. IN NO EVENT  
SHALL SAMSUNG BE LIABLE FOR DAMAGES IN EXCESS OF  
THE PURCHASE PRICE OF THE PRODUCT OR FOR, WITHOUT  
LIMITATION, COMMERCIAL LOSS OF ANY SORT; LOSS OF  
USE, TIME, DATA, REPUTATION, OPPORTUNITY, GOODWILL,  
PROFITS OR SAVINGS; INCONVENIENCE; INCIDENTAL,  
SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL OR PUNITIVE DAMAGES; OR  
DAMAGES ARISING FROM THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE  
PRODUCT. SOME STATES AND JURISDICTIONS DO NOT  
ALLOW LIMITATIONS ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY  
LASTS, OR THE DISCLAIMER OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL  
OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS  
AND DISCLAIMERS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.  
Nothing in the Product instructions or information shall be  
construed to create an express warranty of any kind with  
respect to the Products. No agent, employee, dealer,  
representative or reseller is authorized to modify or extend  
this Limited Warranty or to make binding representations or  
claims, whether in advertising, presentations or otherwise,  
on behalf of SAMSUNG regarding the Products or this Limited  
Warranty.  
This Limited Warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you  
may also have other rights that vary from state to state.  
SAMSUNG MAKES NO WARRANTIES OR REPRESENTATIONS,  
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, STATUTORY OR OTHERWISE, AS TO  
THE QUALITY, CAPABILITIES, OPERATIONS, PERFORMANCE  
Warranty Information  
230  
What is the procedure for resolving disputes?  
For any arbitration in which your total damage claims,  
exclusive of attorney fees and expert witness fees, are  
$5,000.00 or less (“Small Claim”), the arbitrator may, if you  
prevail, award your reasonable attorney fees, expert witness  
fees and costs as part of any award, but may not grant  
SAMSUNG its attorney fees, expert witness fees or costs  
unless it is determined that the claim was brought in bad  
faith. In a Small Claim case, you shall be required to pay no  
more than half of the total administrative, facility and  
arbitrator fees, or $50.00 of such fees, whichever is less, and  
SAMSUNG shall pay the remainder of such fees.  
Administrative, facility and arbitrator fees for arbitrations in  
which your total damage claims, exclusive of attorney fees  
and expert witness fees, exceed $5,000.00 (“Large Claim”)  
shall be determined according to AAA rules. In a Large Claim  
case, the arbitrator may grant to the prevailing party, or  
apportion among the parties, reasonable attorney fees,  
expert witness fees and costs. Judgment may be entered on  
the arbitrator’s award in any court of competent jurisdiction.  
ALL DISPUTES WITH SAMSUNG ARISING IN ANY WAY FROM  
THIS LIMITED WARRANTY OR THE SALE, CONDITION OR  
PERFORMANCE OF THE PRODUCTS SHALL BE RESOLVED  
EXCLUSIVELY THROUGH FINAL AND BINDING ARBITRATION,  
AND NOT BY A COURT OR JURY.  
Any such dispute shall not be combined or consolidated with  
a dispute involving any other person’s or entity’s Product or  
claim, and specifically, without limitation of the foregoing,  
shall not under any circumstances proceed as part of a class  
action. The arbitration shall be conducted before a single  
arbitrator, whose award may not exceed, in form or amount,  
the relief allowed by the applicable law. The arbitration shall  
be conducted according to the American Arbitration  
Association (AAA) Commercial Arbitration Rules applicable to  
consumer disputes. This arbitration provision is entered  
pursuant to the Federal Arbitration Act. The laws of the State  
of Texas, without reference to its choice of laws principles,  
shall govern the interpretation of the Limited Warranty and all  
disputes that are subject to this arbitration provision. The  
arbitrator shall decide all issues of interpretation and  
application of this arbitration provision and the Limited  
Warranty.  
This arbitration provision also applies to claims against  
SAMSUNG’s employees, representatives and affiliates if any  
such claim arises from the Product’s sale, condition or  
performance.  
231  
You may opt out of this dispute resolution procedure by  
providing notice to SAMSUNG no later than 30 calendar days  
from the date of the first consumer purchaser’s purchase of the  
Product. To opt out, you must send notice by e-mail to  
Severability  
If any portion of this Limited Warranty is held to be illegal or  
unenforceable, such partial illegality or unenforceability shall  
not affect the enforceability of the remainder of the Limited  
Warranty.  
[email protected], with the subject line: “Arbitration  
Opt Out.” You must include in the opt out e-mail (a) your name  
and address; (b) the date on which the Product was purchased;  
(c) the Product model name or model number; and (d) the IMEI  
or MEID or Serial Number, as applicable, if you have it (the IMEI  
or MEID or Serial Number can be found (i) on the Product box;  
(ii) on the Product information screen, which can be found  
under “Settings;” (iii) on a label on the back of the Product  
beneath the battery, if the battery is removable; and (iv) on the  
outside of the Product if the battery is not removable).  
Alternatively, you may opt out by calling 1-888-987-4357 no  
later than 30 calendar days from the date of the first consumer  
purchaser’s purchase of the Product and providing the same  
information. These are the only two forms of notice that will be  
effective to opt out of this dispute resolution procedure. Opting  
out of this dispute resolution procedure will not affect the  
coverage of the Limited Warranty in any way, and you will  
continue to enjoy the benefits of the Limited Warranty.  
Precautions for Transfer and Disposal  
If data stored on this device is deleted or reformatted using  
the standard methods, the data only appears to be removed  
on a superficial level, and it may be possible for someone to  
retrieve and reuse the data by means of special software.  
To avoid unintended information leaks and other problems of  
this sort, it is recommended that the device be returned to  
Samsung’s Customer Care Center for an Extended File  
System (EFS) Clear which will eliminate all user memory and  
return all settings to default settings. Please contact the  
Samsung Customer Care Center for details.  
Important! Please provide warranty information (proof of  
purchase) to Samsung’s Customer Care Center in  
order to provide this service at no charge. If the  
warranty has expired on the device, charges may  
apply.  
Warranty Information  
232  
Samsung Telecommunications America, LLC  
1301 E. Lookout Drive  
Richardson, Texas 75082  
("Software"). Samsung Electronics Co. is a separate company  
from the company that provides the limited warranty for this  
mobile device, Samsung Telecommunications America, LLC.  
Phone: 1-800-SAMSUNG  
Phone: 1-888-987-HELP (4357)  
©2012 Samsung Telecommunications America, LLC. All  
rights reserved.  
This device requires the use of preloaded software in its  
normal operation. BY USING THE DEVICE OR ITS PRELOADED  
SOFTWARE, YOU ACCEPT THE TERMS OF THIS EULA. IF YOU  
DO NOT ACCEPT THESE TERMS, DO NOT USE THE DEVICE OR  
THE SOFTWARE. INSTEAD, RETURN THE DEVICE TO THE  
RETAILER FOR A REFUND OR CREDIT.  
No reproduction in whole or in part allowed without prior  
written approval. Specifications and availability subject to  
change without notice. [111611]  
1. GRANT OF LICENSE. Samsung Electronics Co. grants you  
the following rights provided that you comply with all terms  
and conditions of this EULA: You may install, use, access,  
display and run one copy of the Software on the local hard  
disk(s) or other permanent storage media of one computer  
and use the Software on a single computer or a mobile  
device at a time, and you may not make the Software  
available over a network where it could be used by multiple  
computers at the same time. You may make one copy of the  
Software in machine readable form for backup purposes  
only; provided that the backup copy must include all  
copyright or other proprietary notices contained on the  
original.  
End User License Agreement for  
Software  
IMPORTANT. READ CAREFULLY: This End User License  
Agreement ("EULA") is a legal agreement between you  
(either an individual or a single entity) and Samsung  
Electronics Co., Ltd. ("Samsung Electronics Co.") for  
software, owned by Samsung Electronics Co. and its  
affiliated companies and its third party suppliers and  
licensors, that accompanies this EULA, which includes  
computer software and may include associated media,  
printed materials, "online" or electronic documentation  
233  
 
2. RESERVATION OF RIGHTS AND OWNERSHIP. Samsung  
Electronics Co. reserves all rights not expressly granted to  
you in this EULA. The Software is protected by copyright and  
other intellectual property laws and treaties. Samsung  
Electronics Co. or its suppliers own the title, copyright and  
other intellectual property rights in the Software. The  
Software is licensed, not sold.  
customized services or technologies to you and will not  
disclose this information in a form that personally identifies  
you.  
5. UPGRADES. This EULA applies to updates, supplements  
and add-on components (if any) of the Software that  
Samsung Electronics Co. may provide to you or make  
available to you after the date you obtain your initial copy of  
the Software, unless we provide other terms along with such  
upgrade. To use Software identified as an upgrade, you must  
first be licensed for the Software identified by Samsung  
Electronics Co. as eligible for the upgrade. After upgrading,  
you may no longer use the Software that formed the basis for  
your upgrade eligibility.  
3. LIMITATIONS ON END USER RIGHTS. You may not reverse  
engineer, decompile, disassemble, or otherwise attempt to  
discover the source code or algorithms of, the Software  
(except and only to the extent that such activity is expressly  
permitted by applicable law not withstanding this limitation),  
or modify, or disable any features of, the Software, or create  
derivative works based on the Software. You may not rent,  
lease, lend, sublicense or provide commercial hosting  
services with the Software.  
6. SOFTWARE TRANSFER. You may not transfer this EULA or  
the rights to the Software granted herein to any third party  
unless it is in connection with the sale of the mobile device  
which the Software accompanied. In such event, the transfer  
must include all of the Software (including all component  
parts, the media and printed materials, any upgrades, this  
EULA) and you may not retain any copies of the Software.  
The transfer may not be an indirect transfer, such as a  
consignment. Prior to the transfer, the end user receiving the  
Software must agree to all the EULA terms.  
4. CONSENT TO USE OF DATA. You agree that Samsung  
Electronics Co. and its affiliates may collect and use  
technical information gathered as part of the product support  
services related to the Software provided to you, if any.  
Samsung Electronics Co. and its affiliates may use this  
information solely to improve their products or to provide  
Warranty Information  
234  
7. EXPORT RESTRICTIONS. You acknowledge that the  
Software is subject to export restrictions of various countries.  
You agree to comply with all applicable international and  
national laws that apply to the Software, including the U.S.  
Export Administration Regulations, as well as end user, end  
use, and destination restrictions issued by U.S. and other  
governments.  
WORKMANLIKE EFFORT, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR  
PURPOSE, RELIABILITY OR AVAILABILITY, ACCURACY, LACK  
OF VIRUSES, QUIET ENJOYMENT, NON INFRINGEMENT OF  
THIRD PARTY RIGHTS OR OTHER VIOLATION OF RIGHTS.  
SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW EXCLUSIONS OR  
LIMITATIONS OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES, SO THE ABOVE  
EXCLUSIONS OR LIMITATIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. NO  
ADVICE OR INFORMATION, WHETHER ORAL OR WRITTEN,  
OBTAINED BY YOU FROM SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS CO. OR  
ITS AFFILIATES SHALL BE DEEMED TO ALTER THIS  
8. TERMINATION. This EULA is effective until terminated. Your  
rights under this License will terminate automatically without  
notice from Samsung Electronics Co. if you fail to comply  
with any of the terms and conditions of this EULA. Upon  
termination of this EULA, you must cease all use of the  
Software and destroy all copies, full or partial, of the  
Software.  
DISCLAIMER BY SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS CO. OF WARRANTY  
REGARDING THE SOFTWARE, OR TO CREATE ANY WARRANTY  
OF ANY SORT FROM SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS CO.  
10. THIRD-PARTY APPLICATIONS. Certain third party  
applications may be included with, or downloaded to this  
mobile device. Samsung Electronics Co. makes no  
9. Disclaimer of Warranty. ALL SOFTWARE PROVIDED BY  
SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS CO. WITH THIS MOBILE DEVICE IS  
PROVIDED "AS IS" AND ON AN "AS AVAILABLE" BASIS,  
WITHOUT WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND FROM SAMSUNG  
ELECTRONICS CO., EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. TO THE  
FULLEST EXTENT POSSIBLE PURSUANT TO APPLICABLE  
LAW, SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS CO. DISCLAIMS ALL  
WARRANTIES EXPRESS, IMPLIED, OR STATUTORY,  
representations whatsoever about any of these applications.  
Since Samsung Electronics Co. has no control over such  
applications, you acknowledge and agree that Samsung  
Electronics Co. is not responsible for the availability of such  
applications and is not responsible or liable for any content,  
advertising, products, services, or other materials on or  
available from such applications. You expressly acknowledge  
and agree that use of third party applications is at your sole  
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF  
MERCHANTABILITY, SATISFACTORY QUALITY OR  
235  
risk and that the entire risk of unsatisfactory quality,  
DISCLAIMS ANY RESPONSIBILITY FOR ANY DISCLOSURE OF  
INFORMATION OR ANY OTHER PRACTICES OF ANY THIRD  
PARTY APPLICATION PROVIDER.  
performance, accuracy and effort is with you. It is up to you  
to take precautions to ensure that whatever you select to use  
is free of such items as viruses, worms, Trojan horses, and  
other items of a destructive nature. References on this  
mobile device to any names, marks, products, or services of  
any third-parties are provided solely as a convenience to you,  
and do not constitute or imply an endorsement, sponsorship,  
or recommendation of, or affiliation with the third party or its  
products and services. You agree that Samsung Electronics  
Co. shall not be responsible or liable, directly or indirectly, for  
any damage or loss caused or alleged to be caused by, or in  
connection with, use of or reliance on any such third party  
content, products, or services available on or through any  
such application. You acknowledge and agree that the use of  
any third-party application is governed by such third party  
application provider's Terms of Use, License Agreement,  
Privacy Policy, or other such agreement and that any  
11. Disclaimer of Warranty Regarding Third Party  
Applications. SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS CO. DOES NOT  
WARRANT OR MAKE ANY REPRESENTATIONS REGARDING  
THE AVAILABILITY, USE, TIMELINESS, SECURITY, VALIDITY,  
ACCURACY, OR RELIABILITY OF, OR THE RESULTS OF THE  
USE OF, OR OTHERWISE RESPECTING, THE CONTENT OF ANY  
THIRD PARTY APPLICATION WHETHER SUCH THIRD PARTY  
APPLICATION IS INCLUDED WITH THE PRODUCT  
DISTRIBUTED BY SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS CO., IS  
DOWNLOADED, OR OTHERWISE OBTAINED. USE OF ANY  
THIRD PARTY APPLICATION IS DONE AT YOUR OWN  
DISCRETION AND RISK AND YOU ARE SOLELY RESPONSIBLE  
FOR ANY DAMAGE TO THE MOBILE DEVICE OR LOSS OF DATA  
THAT RESULTS FROM THE DOWNLOADING OR USE OF SUCH  
THIRD PARTY APPLICATIONS. SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS CO.  
EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ANY WARRANTY REGARDING  
WHETHER YOUR PERSONAL INFORMATION IS CAPTURED BY  
ANY THIRD PARTY APPLICATION PROVIDER OR THE USE TO  
WHICH SUCH PERSONAL INFORMATION MAY BE PUT BY  
SUCH THIRD PARTY APPLICATION PROVIDER. ANY THIRD  
PARTY APPLICATIONS PROVIDED WITH THIS MOBILE DEVICE  
information or personal data you provide, whether knowingly  
or unknowingly, to such third-party application provider, will  
be subject to such third party application provider's privacy  
policy, if such a policy exists. SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS CO.  
Warranty Information  
236  
ARE PROVIDED "AS IS" AND ON AN "AS AVAILABLE" BASIS,  
WITHOUT WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND FROM SAMSUNG  
ELECTRONICS CO., EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. TO THE  
FULLEST EXTENT POSSIBLE PURSUANT TO APPLICABLE  
LAW, SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS CO. DISCLAIMS ALL  
WARRANTIES EXPRESS, IMPLIED, OR STATUTORY,  
ADVICE OR INFORMATION, WHETHER ORAL OR WRITTEN,  
OBTAINED BY YOU FROM SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS CO. OR  
ANY OTHER PERSON OR ENTITY SHALL BE DEEMED TO  
ALTER THIS DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY REGARDING THIRD  
PARTY APPLICATIONS, OR TO CREATE ANY WARRANTY BY  
SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS CO.  
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF  
MERCHANTABILITY, SATISFACTORY QUALITY OR  
12. Limitation of Liability. SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS CO. WILL  
NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES OF ANY KIND ARISING  
OUT OF OR RELATING TO THE USE OR THE INABILITY TO USE  
THE SOFTWARE OR ANY THIRD PARTY APPLICATION, ITS  
CONTENT OR FUNCTIONALITY, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED  
TO DAMAGES CAUSED BY OR RELATED TO ERRORS,  
OMISSIONS, INTERRUPTIONS, DEFECTS, DELAY IN  
OPERATION OR TRANSMISSION, COMPUTER VIRUS, FAILURE  
TO CONNECT, NETWORK CHARGES, IN-APP PURCHASES,  
AND ALL OTHER DIRECT, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL,  
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES EVEN IF  
SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS CO. HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE  
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO  
NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL  
OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE EXCLUSIONS  
OR LIMITATIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.  
WORKMANLIKE EFFORT, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR  
PURPOSE, RELIABILITY OR AVAILABILITY, ACCURACY, LACK  
OF VIRUSES, QUIET ENJOYMENT, NON INFRINGEMENT OF  
THIRD PARTY RIGHTS OR OTHER VIOLATION OF RIGHTS.  
SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS CO. DOES NOT WARRANT AGAINST  
INTERFERENCE WITH YOUR ENJOYMENT OF THE THIRD  
PARTY APPLICATION, THAT THE FUNCTIONS CONTAINED IN  
THE THIRD PARTY APPLICATION WILL MEET YOUR  
REQUIREMENTS, THAT THE OPERATION OF THE THIRD PARTY  
APPLICATION WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR FREE, OR  
THAT DEFECTS IN THE THIRD PARTY APPLICATION WILL BE  
CORRECTED. YOU ASSUME THE ENTIRE COST OF ALL  
NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR, OR CORRECTION. SOME  
JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW EXCLUSIONS OR  
LIMITATIONS OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES, SO THE ABOVE  
EXCLUSIONS OR LIMITATIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. NO  
NOTWITHSTANDING THE FOREGOING, SAMSUNG  
ELECTRONIC CO.'S TOTAL LIABILITY TO YOU FOR ALL  
237  
LOSSES, DAMAGES, CAUSES OF ACTION, INCLUDING BUT  
NOT LIMITED TO THOSE BASED ON CONTRACT, TORT, OR  
OTHERWISE, ARISING OUT OF YOUR USE OF THE SOFTWARE  
OR THIRD PARTY APPLICATIONS ON THIS MOBILE DEVICE, OR  
ANY OTHER PROVISION OF THIS EULA, SHALL NOT EXCEED  
THE AMOUNT PURCHASER PAID SPECIFICALLY FOR THIS  
MOBILE DEVICE OR ANY SUCH THIRD PARTY APPLICATION  
THAT WAS INCLUDED WITH THIS MOBILE DEVICE. THE  
FOREGOING LIMITATIONS, EXCLUSIONS, AND DISCLAIMERS  
(INCLUDING SECTIONS 9, 10, 11 AND 12) SHALL APPLY TO  
THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW,  
EVEN IF ANY REMEDY FAILS ITS ESSENTIAL PURPOSE.  
14. APPLICABLE LAW. This EULA is governed by the laws of  
TEXAS, without regard to conflicts of laws principles. This  
EULA shall not be governed by the UN Convention on  
Contracts for the International Sale of Goods, the application  
of which is expressly excluded.  
15. DISPUTE RESOLUTION.  
(a) Non-United States residents. If a dispute, controversy or  
difference is not amicably settled, it shall be finally resolved  
by arbitration in Seoul, Korea in accordance with the  
Arbitration Rules of the Korean Commercial Arbitration Board.  
The award of arbitration shall be final and binding upon the  
parties.  
13. U.S. Government End Users Restricted Rights. The  
Software is licensed only with "restricted rights" and as  
"commercial items" consisting of "commercial software"  
and "commercial software documentation" with only those  
rights as are granted to all other end users pursuant to the  
terms and conditions herein. All Products are provided only  
with "restricted rights" with only those rights as are granted  
to all other end users pursuant to the terms and conditions  
herein. All Software and Products are provided subject to  
Federal Acquisition Regulation (FAR) 52.227.19.  
(b) United States residents. ALL DISPUTES WITH SAMSUNG  
ELECTRONICS CO. ARISING IN ANY WAY FROM THIS EULA OR  
YOUR USE OF THE SOFTWARE SHALL BE RESOLVED  
EXCLUSIVELY THROUGH FINAL AND BINDING ARBITRATION,  
AND NOT BY A COURT OR JURY. Any such dispute shall not  
be combined or consolidated with any other person's or  
entity's claim or dispute, and specifically, without limitation  
of the foregoing, shall not under any circumstances proceed  
as part of a class action. The arbitration shall be conducted  
before a single arbitrator, whose award may not exceed, in  
form or amount, the relief allowed by the applicable law. The  
Warranty Information  
238  
arbitration shall be conducted according to the American  
Arbitration Association (AAA) Commercial Arbitration Rules  
applicable to consumer disputes. This arbitration provision is  
entered pursuant to the Federal Arbitration Act. The laws of  
the State of Texas, without reference to its choice of laws  
principles, shall govern the interpretation of the EULA and all  
disputes that are subject to this arbitration provision. The  
arbitrator shall decide all issues of interpretation and  
application of this arbitration provision and the EULA. For  
any arbitration in which your total damage claims, exclusive  
of attorney fees and expert witness fees, are $5,000.00 or  
less ("Small Claim"), the arbitrator may, if you prevail, award  
your reasonable attorney fees, expert witness fees and costs  
as part of any award, but may not grant Samsung Electronics  
Co. its attorney fees, expert witness fees or costs unless it is  
determined that the claim was brought in bad faith. In a  
Small Claim case, you shall be required to pay no more than  
half of the total administrative, facility and arbitrator fees, or  
$50.00 of such fees, whichever is less, and Samsung  
Electronics Co. shall pay the remainder of such fees.  
case, the arbitrator may grant to the prevailing party, or  
apportion among the parties, reasonable attorney fees,  
expert witness fees and costs. Judgment may be entered on  
the arbitrator's award in any court of competent jurisdiction.  
This arbitration provision also applies to claims against  
Samsung Electronics Co.'s employees, representatives and  
affiliates if any such claim arises from the licensing or use of  
the Software. You may opt out of this dispute resolution  
procedure by providing notice to Samsung Electronics Co. no  
later than 30 calendar days from the date of the first  
consumer purchaser's purchase of this device. To opt out,  
you must send notice by e-mail to  
[email protected], with the subject line: "Arbitration  
Opt Out." You must include in the opt out e-mail (a) your  
name and address; (b) the date on which the device was  
purchased; (c) the device model name or model number; and  
(d) the IMEI or MEID or Serial Number, as applicable, if you  
have it (the IMEI or MEID or Serial Number can be found (i) on  
the device box; (ii) on the device information screen, which  
can be found under "Settings;" (iii) on a label on the back of  
the device beneath the battery, if the battery is removable;  
and (iv) on the outside of the device if the battery is not  
removable). Alternatively, you may opt out by calling 1-888-  
987-4357 no later than 30 calendar days from the date of  
Administrative, facility and arbitrator fees for arbitrations in  
which your total damage claims, exclusive of attorney fees  
and expert witness fees, exceed $5,000.00 ("Large Claim")  
shall be determined according to AAA rules. In a Large Claim  
239  
the first consumer purchaser's purchase of the device and  
providing the same information. These are the only two  
forms of notice that will be effective to opt out of this dispute  
resolution procedure. Opting out of this dispute resolution  
procedure will not affect your use of the device or its  
preloaded Software, and you will continue to enjoy the  
benefits of this license.  
16. ENTIRE AGREEMENT; SEVERABILITY. This EULA is the  
entire agreement between you and Samsung Electronics Co.  
relating to the Software and supersedes all prior or  
contemporaneous oral or written communications, proposals  
and representations with respect to the Software or any other  
subject matter covered by this EULA. If any provision of this  
EULA is held to be void, invalid, unenforceable or illegal, the  
other provisions shall continue in full force and effect.  
[101212]  
Warranty Information  
240  
Section 13: Samsung Product Registration  
Sign Up Now  
Customize your Samsung device experience  
• Activate product warranty  
• Access to a personalized My Samsung Mobile account  
• No monthly fees  
Get More  
• Latest info on promotions, events and special offers on related products  
• Review Samsung products and share your opinion  
• Great deals on downloads  
Register now at  
www.samsung.com/register  
Scan this code to go  
directly to the registration page.  
241  
 
Index  
Managing Address Book Contacts  
Service Dialing Numbers 85  
Using Contacts List 76  
Address Book Options 80  
Adobe PDF 197  
managing 135  
A
running services 135  
AT&T Code Scanner 178  
AT&T FamilyMap 179  
AT&T Locker 179  
AT&T Music  
Playlists 91  
AT&T Navigator 179  
AT&T Smart Wi-Fi 167  
B
Back key 34  
Battery  
charging 9  
Installing 7  
Abc mode 68  
About Device 154  
Accounts 148  
Add accounts 148  
Adding a New Contact  
Idle Screen 74  
Airplane mode 123, 131  
Alarm 183  
Address Book 73  
AllShare  
Definitions 174  
Adding a New Contact 74  
Adding Pauses to Contact  
Numbers 75  
Copying a contact to the Phone 84  
Copying Contacts to Phone 84  
Copying Contacts to SIM Card 83  
Deleting Address Book Entries 85  
Deleting Contacts from SIM card  
AllShare Cast 129  
AllShare Play 174  
Configuring Settings 176  
Group Cast 177  
Sharing Media 177  
AllShareCast Hub 175  
Applications  
Low Battery Indicator 11  
Battery Use & Safety 213  
Bigger Font  
Using the Camcorder 102  
Using the Camera 97  
World Clock 184  
Applications settings  
allow mock locations 154  
Dialing a Number 76  
Favorites 83  
Finding an Address Book Entry 77  
Group Settings 82  
Setting 152  
Blocking Mode 130  
Bluetooth  
Outgoing Headset Condition 62  
242  
 
Sending contacts 171  
Books  
Play Books 196  
Saving a recent call number to  
Address Book 54  
Searching for a Number in  
Address Book 60  
Using the Speakerphone 59  
Viewing All Calls 53  
Viewing Missed Calls 53  
Camcorder 102  
Camcorder Options 103  
Shooting Video 102  
Camcorder Options  
Camcorder Options after a Video is  
Taken 105  
Camera 97  
Camera Options 98  
Lock Screen Shortcut 137  
Taking Pictures 97  
Camercorder  
Taking Pictures During Video 103  
Care and Maintenance 218  
Changing Your Settings 121  
Charging battery 9  
ChatON 118  
Register 118  
Using 119  
Children and Cell Phones 209  
Clock 137, 183  
Code Scanner 178  
Contacts 73  
Cookies  
Emptying 161  
Creating a Playlist 91  
D
Developer Options 154  
Dialing Options 53  
Display  
C
Calculator 180  
Calendar 181  
Call Functions 49  
3-WayCalling(Multi-PartyCalling)  
Address Book 52  
Adjusting the Call Volume 56  
Answering a Call 52  
Call Back Missed Call 54  
Call Duration 56  
Call Log 53  
Call Waiting 60  
Correcting the Number 50  
Dialing a Recent Number 50  
Ending a Call 50  
International Call 49  
Making a Call 49  
Manual Pause Dialing 49  
Options During a Call 56  
Putting a Call on Hold 57  
icons 23  
Using Negative Colors 153  
Display / Touch-Screen 217  
Do cell phones pose a health hazard?  
Downloads 186  
Draft Messages 107  
E
Email 113  
Creating a Corporate Email  
Account 114  
Adding a Buddy 119  
243  
Creating Additional Email  
Accounts 114  
Flipboard 187  
Font Size  
GPS 217  
Group  
Switching Between Email  
Accounts 115  
Caption 202  
Changing 152  
Adding a contact 82  
Editing 82  
Emergency Calls 218  
Making 50  
With SIM 50  
Without SIM 50  
Entering Text 67  
Changing the Text Entry Mode 68  
Using 123Sym Mode 69  
Using Abc Mode 68  
Using Swype 70, 71  
Using Symbol/Numeric Mode 69  
Exposure to Radio Frequency (RF)  
Signals 205  
Removing a contact 82  
Group Cast 177  
Group Settings  
G
Gallery 94  
viewing pictures 95  
viewing videos 95  
Editing a Caller Group 82  
H
Handwriting feature 70  
Health and Safety Information 205  
Home City  
Setting 137  
Home key 34  
Gestures  
Browse Image 36, 150  
Overview 35  
Screen Capture 37, 150  
Shake to Update 36, 150  
Tilt to Zoom 36, 149  
Getting Started 6  
Setting Up Your Phone 6  
Voice mail 13  
Hotspot Guru 168  
Hotspots 168  
F
I
Facebook  
Gmail 115  
Icons  
Swpe Connect 145  
Family Map 179  
FCC Hearing Aid Compatibility (HAC)  
Regulations for Wireless Devices 223  
FCC Notice and Cautions 225  
Featured Apps 187  
Personalize Swype 145  
Google Chrome 183  
Google Maps 190  
Google Play Music 92  
Google Voice Typing 70  
Google voice typing settings 143  
Application 27  
Indicator 23  
Icons, description 23  
In-Call Options 56  
Incognito 159  
Create Window 159  
244  
Exit Window 159  
Information Ticker 137  
Ink Effect  
Lock Screen 137  
International Call 49  
Internet 157  
Camera Quick Access 138  
Clock 137  
Dual Clock 137  
Ripple Effect 137  
Say Wake-Up Command 138  
Shortcuts 137  
Creating and Sending Text  
Messages 106  
Deleting a message 110  
Draft 107  
Gmail 115  
Handwriting 70  
Ticker 137  
Weather 137  
Locked 108  
Options 107  
J
Joining Contacts 78  
Scheduled Messages 108  
Settings 111  
Signing into Email 113  
Signing into Gmail 115  
Spam 108  
M
K
Keyboard Input Methods 142  
Keyboard settings 143  
Keypad  
Changing Text Input 68  
Kies via Wi-Fi 125  
L
Landscape 67  
Language and input 142  
Language and keyboard settings  
select locale 142  
Maps 190  
Media Hub 31, 86  
Memory Card 47  
Memory Card Installation 8  
Menu  
Split View 111  
Types of Messages 106  
Messenger 117, 192  
microSD card 8, 47  
Installing 8  
key 34  
Menu Navigation 34  
Message  
Reply 120  
Removing 8  
Message Options 107  
Message Search 111  
Messaging  
Adding a Signature 113  
Block Unknown Senders 113  
microSDHC card 8, 47  
Mobile Hotspot 125  
Mobile Web 157  
Entering Text in the Mobile Web  
Browser 158  
Latitude 188  
Local 190  
Location services settings 136  
Lock Screen  
245  
Navigating with the Mobile Web  
Using Bookmarks 159  
Mono  
Audio Setup 153  
Movies 94  
Multimedia 86  
Music File Extensions  
3GP 89  
AAC 89  
AAC+ 89  
eAAC+ 89  
M4A 89  
myAT&T 193  
Front View 16  
icons 23  
Rear View 18  
N
Navigation 194  
Side View 17  
command keys 34  
context-sensitive menus 35  
terms used 34  
touch gestures 34  
Navigation Options 195  
Navigator 179  
Negative Colors 153  
NFC 173  
Switching On/Off 11  
Phone information 154  
Pictures 94  
Gallery 94  
Sharing 95  
Places 196  
Play Books 196  
Play Movies & TV 94  
Play Music 92  
Play Store 197  
Pointer speed 147  
Polaris Office 4.0 197  
Polaris® Office 32, 197  
Powering  
Off 11  
Privacy settings  
factory data reset 148  
O
MP3 89  
MP4 89  
WMA 89  
One-handed operation 142  
Operating Environment 221  
Other Important Safety Information  
Music Hub 88  
Making a Purchase 89  
Music Player 89  
adding music 92  
creating a playlist 91  
removing music 92  
Mute 57, 60  
My Files 192  
Owner information 138  
P
Page buddy 132  
PC Connections 171  
Pen Settings 150  
Phone  
Q
QWERTY keypad 67  
246  
S Voice 199  
Set Wake-Up Command 138  
SafeSearch  
Filtering 202  
Samsung Mobile Products and Recy-  
cling 215  
scientific calculator 181  
Screen Capture 37, 150, 178  
SD Card 47  
Block Unknown Senders 113  
Manually Register a Number 113  
Register a Phrase 113  
Settings 113  
Spam Messages 108  
Assigning 108  
Speakerphone Key 59  
Specific Absorption Rate (SAR) Certi-  
fication Information 210  
Standard Limited Warranty 228  
Stopwatch 185  
R
Ready2Go 12  
Reducing Exposure  
Hands-Free Kits and Other  
Accessories 208  
Reject list 55  
Reset  
factory data 148  
Responsible Listening 219  
Restricting Children's Access to Your  
Mobile device 225  
Ripple 137  
Security 147  
Security settings  
device administration 140  
trusted credentials 140  
Service Dialing Numbers 85  
Settings 121  
Shortcuts 23  
SIM card  
installation 7  
Installing 6  
Smart Practices While Driving 212  
Smart Wi-Fi 167  
Snooze 184  
Software Update 155  
Spam  
Swap 58  
SWYPE  
Ripple Effect  
entering text using 70, 71  
Lock Screen 137  
S
S Beam  
Swype  
Cellular Data 146  
Connect 145  
Contribute Data Usage 146  
Personal Dictionary 146  
Preferences 145  
Sharing Multiple Pictures 96  
Sharing Pictures 95  
S Note 198  
Updates 146  
S Pen  
Swype Keypad Settings 144  
Swype Settings 72  
Symbol/Numeric mode 69  
Functionality 19  
Settings 150  
S Suggest 198  
247  
Synchronization settings  
auto-sync 136  
Front View 16  
Rear View 18  
Side Views 17  
Unmute 57  
USB settings  
mass storage device 172  
USB Tethering 125  
Using Favorites  
Adding Favorites 160  
Deleting a Favorite 160  
Editing Favorites 160  
Widgets  
Calculator 28  
Camera 28  
T
T9 Trace 143  
Tethering 125  
Text Input  
Abc mode 68  
Methods 67  
numeric mode 69  
symbol mode 69  
Timer 185  
Automatic Answering 62  
Touch Screen 12  
Lock/Unlock 12  
Transferring Large Files 95  
Travel Charger 9  
Using 10  
Email 29  
Gmail 29, 187  
Settings 33, 199  
Video Player 33  
Voice Recorder 33, 200  
YouTube 33  
Wi-Fi 164  
using Kies via Wi-Fi 129  
Wi-Fi Direct 166  
World Clock  
Deleting an Entry 185  
World clock 184  
Y
YouTube 201  
V
Video Player 93  
Voice Mail  
Accessing 14  
From Another Phone 14  
Setup 13  
TTY Mode 65  
Twitter  
Personalize Swype 145  
Voice Recorder 200  
Volume 131  
W
Warranty Information 228  
Weather  
High Quality 202  
SafeSearch Filtering 202  
Settings 202  
YPmobile (Yellowpages mobile) 203  
U
UL Certified Travel Charger 216  
Understanding Your Phone 15  
Features of Your Phone 15  
Setting 137  
Web 157  
248  

Verizon V CAST MUSIC VX8100 User Manual
Tascam cdrw 402 User Manual
Sylvania SRCD182 User Manual
SSD COMPANY LIMITED Servo drive 637f User Manual
Sony Hi MD Walkman MCMD R1 User Manual
Sony Ericsson WHITE PAPER T312 User Manual
Sears 247780892 User Manual
Seagate ST3541A User Manual (1)
Samsung Spinpiont HM080JI User Manual
Rover 9859 9862 9848 9858 9885 User Manual